Program Summary · 2013-07-18 · Program Summary XC series PLC as the controllers, accept ... C Language Function Block ... please refer《XC series PLC user manual【software part

1 Program Summary

XC series PLC as the controllers, accept the signal and execute the program in the

controller, to fulfill the requirements from the users. In this chapter, we start with the

program forms, introduce the main features, the supported two program languages etc.

1-1．Programmer Controller’s Features

1-2．Program Language

1-3．Program Format

1-1．Program Controller’s Features

XC series PLC support two kinds of program languages, instruction list and ladder,

the two languages can convert to the other;

To avoid the stolen or wrong modifying of user program, we encrypt the program.

When uploading the encrypted program, it will check in the form of password. This

can maintain the user’s copyright; meantime, it limits the download, to avoid the

modification with the program spitefully.

When the user program is too long, adding comments to the program and its soft

components is necessary.

Add offset appendix (like X3[D100]、M10[D100]、D0[D100]) behind coils, data

registers can realize indirect addressing. For example, when D100=9, X3[D100]=X14;

M10[D100]=M19, D0[D100]=D9

l XC series PLC offers enough basic instructions, can fulfill basic sequential

control, data moving and comparing, arithmetic operation, logic control, data

loop and shift etc.

l XC series PLC also support special compare, high speed pulse, frequency testing,

precise time, PID control, position control etc for interruption, high speed counter

(HSC).

XC series PLC support C language function block, users can call the edited function

block freely. This function reduces the program quantity greatly.

Program Language

Security of the Program

Program’s comments

Rich Basic Functions

C Language Function Block

Stop when power ON Function

Offset Function

XC series PLC support “Stop when power on PLC” function. With this function,

when there is a serious problem during PLC running, use this method to stop all

output immediately. Besides, with this method, connect PLC when parameters are set

wrongly.

XC series PLC support many communication formats, like basic Modbus

communication, CABBUS communication, free format communication. Besides, via

special network module, connect to Ether net, GPRS net.

1-2．Program Language

1-2-1．Type

XC series PLC support two types of program language:

Instruction list inputs in the form of “LD”, “AND”, “OUT” etc. This is the basic input

form of the programs, but it’s hard to read and understand;

E.g.: Step Instruction Soft Components

With sequential control signal and soft components, draw the sequential control graph

on program interface, this method is called “Ladder”. This method use coil signs etc.

to represent sequential circuit, so it’s easier to understand the program. Meantime,

monitor PLC with the circuit’s status.

E.g.:

X0 X2

Y5

Y5

0 LD X000

1 OR Y005

2 ANI X002

3 OUT Y005

Instruction List

Ladder

Communication Function

1-2-2．Alternation

Convert the above two methods freely:

1-3．Program Format

The above two program methods can input in the correspond interface separately, especially in the

ladder window, there is a instruction hint function, which improves the program efficiency greatly;

As in XC series PLC, there are many instructions which has complicate usage and

many using methods, like pulse output instruction, main unit PID etc. XCPPro also

support the configure interface for these special instructions. In the correcpond

configure interface, input the parameters and ID according to the requirements will be

ok;

Instruction Ladder

Direct Input

Panel Configuration

For the details of panel configuration, please refer《XC series PLC user manual【software part】》

2 Soft Component’s Function

In chapter 1, we briefly tell the program language of XC series PLC. However, the most important

element to a program is the operands. These elements relate to the relays and registers inside the

controller. In this chapter, we will describe the functions and using methods of these relays and

registers.

2-1．Summary of the Soft Components

2-2．Structure of the Soft Components

2-3．List of the Soft Components

2-4．Input/output Relays (X、Y)

2-5．Auxiliary Relays (M)

2-6．Status Relays (S)

2-7．Timers (T)

2-8．Counters (C)

2-9．Data Registers (D)

2-10．Constant (K、H)

2-11．Pointer (P、I)

2-12．Program Principle

2-1．Summary of the Soft Components

There are many relays, timers and counters inside PLC. They all have countless NO (Normally

ON) and NC (Normally Closed) contactors. Connect these contactors with the coils will make a

sequential control circuit. Below, we will introduce these soft components briefly;

l Usage of the input relays

The input relays are used to accept the external ON/OFF signal, we use X to state.

l Address Specify Principle

Ø In each basic unit, specify the ID of input relay, output relay in the form of

X000~X007，X010~X017…,Y000~Y007，Y010~Y017… (octal form)

Ø The expansion module’s ID obeys the principle of channel 1 starts from X100/Y100,

channel 2 starts from X200/Y200… 7 expansions can be connected in total.

l Points to pay attention when using

Ø For the input relay’s input filter, we use digital filter. Users can change the filter

parameters via relate settings.

Ø We equip enough output relays inside PLC; for the output relays beyond the

input/output points, use them as auxiliary relays, program as normal contactors/coils.

l Usage of the output relays

Output relays are the interface of drive external loads, represent with sign Y;

l Address Assignment Principle

Ø In each basic unit，assign the ID of output relays in the form of Y000~Y007，

Y010~Y017… this octal format.

Ø The ID of expansion obeys the principle of: channel 1 starts from Y100, channel 2 starts

from Y200… 7 expansions could be connected totally.

l Usage of Auxiliary Relays

Auxiliary relays are equipped inside PLC, represent with the sign of M;

l Address assignment principle

In basic units, assign the auxiliary address in the form of decimal

l Points to note

Ø This type of relays are different with the input/output relays, they can’t get external load,

can only use in program;

Ø Retentive relays can keep its ON/OFF status in case of PLC power OFF;

Output Relay（Y）

Auxiliary Relays（M）

Input Relay (X)

l Usage of status relays

Used as relays in Ladder, represent with “S”


In basic units, assign the ID in the form of decimal

l Points to note

If not used as operation number, they can be used as auxiliary relays, program as

normal contactors/coils. Besides, they can be used as signal alarms, for external

diagnose.

l Usage of the timers

Timers are used to calculate the time pulse like 1ms, 10ms, 100ms etc. when reach the

set value, the output contactors acts, represent with “T”


In basic units, assign the timer’s ID in the form of decimal. But divide ID into several parts

according to the clock pulse, accumulate or not. Please refer to chapter 2-2 for details.

l Time pulse

There are three specifications for the timer’s clock pulse: 1ms、10ms、100ms. If choose 10ms timer,

carry on addition operation with 10ms time pulse;

l Accumulation/not accumulation

The times are divided into two modes: accumulation time means even the timer coil’s driver is

OFF, the timer will still keep the current value; while the not accumulation time means when the

count value reaches the set value, the output contact acts, the count value clears to be 0;

According to different application and purpose, we can divide the counters to different types as

below:

l For internal count (for general using/power off retentive usage)

Ø 16 bits counter: for increment count, the count range is 1~32,767

Ø 32 bits counter: for increment count, the count range is 1~2,147,483,647

Ø These counters can be used by PLC’s internal signal. The response speed is one scan

cycle or longer.

l For High Speed Count (Power off retentive)

Ø 32 bits counter: for increment/decrement count, the count range is -2,147,483,648~

+2,147,483,647

(single phase increment count, single phase increment/decrement count, AB phase cont)

specify to special input points （

Status Relays（S）

Timer（T）

Counter（C）

Ø The high speed counter can count 80KHz frequency, it separates with the PLC’s scan

cycle;

l Usage of Data Registers

Data Registers are used to store data, represent with “D”

l Addressing Form

The data registers in XC series PLC are all 16 bits (the highest bit is the sign bit), combine

two data registers together can operate 32 bits (the highest bit is the sign bit) data process.

l Points to note

Same with other soft components, data registers also have common usage type and power off

retentive type.

l Usage of FlashROM registers

FlashROM registers are used to store data soft components, represent with “FD”

l Addressing Form

In basic units, FlashROM registers are addressed in form of decimal;

l Points to note

Even the battery powered off, this area can keep the data. So this area is used to store

important parameters. FlashROM can write in about 1,000,000 times, and it takes time at

every write. Frequently write can cause permanent damage of FD.

l In every type of data in PLC, B represents Binary, K represents Decimal, H represents

Hexadecimal. They are used to set timers and counters value, or operands of application

instructions.

Data Register（D）

FlashROM Register（FD）

Constant（B）（K）（H）

2-2．Structure of Soft Components

2-2-1．Structure of Memory

In XC series PLC, there are many registers. Besides the common data registers D, FlashROM

registers, we can also make registers by combining bit soft components.

Data Register D

l For common use, 16 bits

l For common use, 32 bits (via combine two sequential 16 bits registers)

l For power off retentive usage, can modify the retentive zone

l For special usage, occupied by the system, can’t be used as common instruction’s parameters

l For offset usage (indirect specifies)

Ø Form: Dn[Dm]、Xn[Dm] 、Yn[Dm] 、Mn[Dm] etc.

MOV D10[D0] D100M8000

M2

Y0[D0]

MOV K5 D0

M8002MOV K0 D0

In the above sample, if D0=0, then D100=D10, Y0 is ON.

If M2 turns from OFF to be ON, D0=5, then D100=D15, Y5 is ON.

Therein, D10[D0]=D[10+D0]，Y0[D0]=Y[0+D0]。

Ø The word offset combined by bit soft components: DXn[Dm] represents DX[n+Dm]。

Ø The soft components with offset, the offset can be represent by soft component D.

Timer T/Counter C

l For common usage, 16 bits, represent the current value of timer/counter;

l For common usage, 32 bits, (via combine two sequential 16 bits registers)

l To represent them, just use the letter+ID method, such as T10, C11.

E.g.

MOV D0T11M0

T11Y1

X0T11 K99

In the above example, MOV T11 D0, T11 represents word register;

LD T11, T11 represents bit register.

Bit soft components combined to be register


l The soft components which can be combined to be words are: X、Y、M、S、

T、C

l Format: add “D” in front of soft components, like DM10, represents a 16

bits data from M10~M25

l Get 16 points from DXn, but not beyond the soft components range;

l The word combined by bit soft components can’t realize bit addressing;

E.g.:

MOV K21 DY0M0

MOV K3 D0M1

MOV DX2[D0] D10M8000

Ø When M0 changes from OFF to be ON, the value in the word which is

combined by Y0~Y17 equals 21, i.e. Y0、Y2、Y4 becomes to be ON

Ø Before M1 activates, if D0=0, DX2[D0] represents a word combined by

X2~X21

Ø If M1 changes from OFF→ON, D0=3，then DX2[D0] represents a

Expansion’s internal register ED

l For common usage, 16 bits,


FlashROM Register FD

l For power off retentive usage, 16 bits

l For power off retentive usage, 16 bits, (via combine two sequential 16 bits registers)

l For special usage, occupied by the system, can’t be used as common instruction’s

parameters

2-2-2．Structure of Bit Soft Components

Bit soft components structure is simple, the common ones are X、Y、M、S、T、C, besides, a bit

of a register can also represents:

Relay

l Input Relay X, octal type

l Output Relay Y, octal type

l Auxiliary Relay M、S, decimal type

l Auxiliary Relay T、C, decimal type, as the represent method is same with

registers, so we need to judge if it’s word register or bit register according to

the register.

Register’s Bit

l Composed by register’s bit, support register D

l Represent method: Dn.m (0≤m≤15): the Nr.m bit of Dn register

l The represent method of word with offset: Dn[Dm].x

l Bit of Word can’t compose to be word again;

E.g.:

D0.4Y0

D5[D1].4Y1

Ø D0.4 means when the Nr.4 bit of D0 is 1, set Y0 ON .

Ø D5[D1].4 means bit addressing with offset, if D1=5, then D5[D1]

means the Nr.4 bit of D10

2-3．Soft Components List

2-3-1．Soft Components List

Range points Mnemonic Name

10I/O 16 I/O 24 I/O 32 I/O 10 I/O 16 I/O 24 I/O 32 I/O

Input Points X0~X4 X0~X7 X0~X13 X0~X17 5 8 12 16 I/O points

※1 Output Points Y0~Y4 Y0~Y7 Y0~Y13 Y0~Y17 5 8 12 16

X※2 Internal Relay X0~X77 64

Y※3 Internal Relay Y0~Y77 64

M0~M199【M200~M319】※4 320

For Special Usage ※5M8000~M8079




M Internal Relay


128

S Flow S0~S31 32

T0~T23: 100ms not accumulation

T100~T115: 100ms accumulation




T Timer


80

C0~C23: 16 bits forward counter

C300~C315: 32 bits forward/backward

counter

C600~C603: single-phase HSC

C620~C621

C Counter

C630~C631

48

D0~D99【D100~D149】※4 150

For Special Usage ※5D8000~D8029





D Data Register


138

FD FlashROM FD0~FD411 412

XC1 Series

For Special Usage ※5FD8000~FD8011




Register※6


98

Range Points

Mnemonic Name 14 I/O 16 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O

14

I/O

16

I/O

24/32

I/O

48/60

I/O

Input

Points X0~X7 X0~X7

X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 8 8 14/18 28/36

I/O Points※1 Output

Points Y0~Y5 Y0~Y7

Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 6 8 10/14 20/24

X※2

Internal

Relay X0~X1037 544

Y※3

Internal

Relay Y0~Y1037 544

M0~M2999

【M3000~M7999】※4

8000 M

Internal

Relay For Special Usage

※5M8000~M8767 768

S Flow S0~S511

【S512~S1023】※4

1024







T Timer

T600~T639: 1ms precise time

640



counter


C620~C629: double-phase HSC

C Counter

C630~C639: AB phase HSC

640

D0~D999

【D4000~D4999】※4

2000 D Data

Register

For Special Usage※5D8000~D8511 612

XC2 Series

For Special Usage※5D8630~D8729

FD0~FD127 128 FD

FLASH

Register For Special Usage※5FD8000~FD8383 384

Range Points

Mnemonic Name 14 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O

14

I/O

24/32

I/O

48/60

I/O

Input Points X0~X7 X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 8 14/18 28/36

I/O Points※1

Output Points Y0~Y5 Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 6 10/14 20/24



M0~M2999

【M3000~M7999】※4

8000 M Internal Relay

For Special Usage※5M8000~M8767 768

S Flow S0~S511

【S512~S1023】※4

1024







T TIMER


640


C300~C599: 32 bits forward/backward counter



C COUNTER


640

D0~D3999

【D4000~D7999】※4

8000 D

DATA

REGISTER For Special Usage

※5D8000~D9023 1024

XC3 Series

FD0~FD1535 1536 FD

FlashROM

REGISTER※6 For Special Usage

※5FD8000~FD8511 512

ED※7

EXPANSION’S

INTERNAL

REGISTER

ED0~ED16383 16384

I/O RANGE POINTS Mnemonic Name

24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O

Input Points X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 14/18 28/36

I/O Points※1

Output Points Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 10/14 20/24



M0~M3999

【M4000~M7999】※4



S Flow S0~S511

【S512~S1023】※4

1024







T TIMER


640





C COUNTER


640

D0~D3999

【D4000~D7999】※4

8000 D

DATA


※5D8000~D9023 1024


XC5 Series

REGISTER※6 For Special Usage

※5FD8000~FD9023 1024

ED※7

EXPANSION’S

INTERNAL

REGISTER

ED0~ED36863 36864

I/O range Points Mnemonic Name

24/32 I/O 48 I/O 24/32 I/O 48 I/O

Input Points X0~X15

X0~X21 X0~X33 14/18 28

I/O Points※1

Output Points Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15 Y0~Y23 10/14 20



M0~M2999

【M3000~M7999】※4



S Flow S0~S511

【S512~S1023】※4

1024







T TIMER


640



counter



C COUNTER


640

D0~D2999

【D4000~D4999】※4

4000 D

DATA


※5D8000~D9023 1024


XCM Series

For Special Usage※5FD8000~FD8349 REGISTER

※6

For Special Usage※5FD8890~FD8999

460

ED※7

EXPANSION’S

INTERNAL

REGISTER

ED0~ED36863 36864

※1: I/O points, means the terminal number that users can use to wire the input, output

※2: X, means the internal input relay, the X beyond Input points can be used as middle relay;

※3: Y, means the internal output relay, the Y beyond Output points can be used as middle relay;

※4: The memory zone in【】 is power off retentive zone, soft components D、M、S、T、C can change the

retentive area via setting. Please refer to 2-3-2 for details;

※5: for special use, means the special registers occupied by the system, can’t be used for other purpose. Please

refer to Appendix 1.

※6: FlashROM registers needn’t set the power off retentive zone, when power is off (no battery), the data will not

lose

※7: Expansion’s internal register ED, require PLC hardware V3.0 or above

※8: Input coils、output relays are in octal form, the other registers are in decimal form;

※9: The I/O that are not wired with external device can be used as fast internal relays;

※10: for the soft components of expansion devices, please refer to relate manuals;

2-3-2．Power Off Retentive Zone

The power off retentive area of XC series PLC are set as below, this area can be set by user again;

Soft

components

SET

AREA FUNCTION

System’s

default

value

Retentive

Zone

D FD8202 Start tag of D power off retentive zone 100 D100~D149

M FD8203 Start tag of M power off retentive

zone 200 M200~M319

T FD8204 Start tag of T power off retentive zone 640 Not set

C FD8205 Start tag of C power off retentive zone 320 C320~C631

XC1

Series

S FD8206 Start tag of S power off retentive zone 512 S0~S31



zone 3000 M3000~M7999



XC2

Series




zone 3000 M3000~M7999




XC3

Series

ED FD8207 Start tag of ED power off retentive

zone 0 ED0~ED16383



zone 4000 M4000~M7999




XC5

Series


zone 0 ED0~ED36863



zone 3000 M3000~M7999


XCM

Series




zone 0 ED0~ED36863

For timer T, we can set not only retentive zone, but also set certain timer’s retentive zone

Soft

Components

Set area Function Retentive Zone

FD8323 Set the start tag of 100ms not accumulation timer’s

retentive zone

The set value ~T99

FD8324 Set the start tag of 100ms accumulation timer’s retentive

zone

The set value~T199


retentive zone

The set value~T299


zone

The set value~T399


retentive zone

The set value~T499


zone

The set value~T599

T

FD8329 Set the start tag of 1ms precise timer’s retentive zone The set value~T639

For counter C, we can set not only retentive zone, but also set certain counter’s retentive

zone

Soft

Components

Set area Function Retentive Zone

FD8330 Set the start tag of 16 bits positive counter’s retentive

zone

The set value~C299

FD8331 Set the start tag of 32 bits positive/negative counter’s

retentive zone

The set value~C599

FD8332 Set the start tag of single phase HSC’s retentive zone The set value~C619

FD8333 Set the start tag of dual direction HSC’s retentive zone The set value~C629

C

FD8334 Set the start tag of AB phase HSC’s retentive zone The set value~C639

※1：if the whole power off retentive zone is smaller than the segment’s retentive area, then the segment’s area is

invalid. If the total counter’s set range is T200~T640, FD8324 value is 150, then the 100ms accumulate timer’s

retentive area T150~T199 is invalid.

2-4．Input/output relays（X、Y）

XC series PLC’s input/output are all in octal form, each series numbers are listed below:

Range Points

Series Name 10I/O 16 I/O 24 I/O 32 I/O 10 I/O

16

I/O 24 I/O 32 I/O

X X0~X4 X0~X7 X0~X13 X0~X17 5 8 12 16 XC1

Y Y0~Y4 Y0~Y7 Y0~Y13 Y0~Y17 5 8 12 16

Range Points

Series Name 14 I/O 16 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O

14

I/O

16

I/O 24/32 I/O

48/60

I/O

X X0~X7 X0~X7 X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 8 8 14/18 28/36

XC2

Y Y0~Y5 Y0~Y7 Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 6 8 10/14 20/24

Range Points

Series Name 14 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O 14 I/O 24/32 I/O

48/60

I/O

X X0~X7 X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 8 14/18 28/36

XC3

Y Y0~Y5 Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 6 10/14 20/24

Range Points Series Name

24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O 24/32 I/O 48/60 I/O

X X0~X15

X0~X21

X0~X33

X0~X43 14/18 28/36

XC5

Y Y0~Y11

Y0~Y15

Y0~Y23

Y0~Y27 10/14 20/24

Range Points Series Name

24 I/O 32 I/O 48 I/O 24 I/O 32 I/O 48 I/O

X X0~X15 X0~X21 X0~X33 14 18 28 XCM

Y Y0~Y11 Y0~Y15 Y0~Y23 10 14 20

Number List

Input Relay X

l PLC’s input terminals are used to accept the external signal input, while the input relays are a

type of optical relays to connect PLC inside and input terminals;

l The input relays have countless normally ON/OFF contactors, they can be used freely;

l The input relays which are not connected with external devices can be used as fast internal

relays;

Output Relay Y

l PLC’s output terminals can be used to send signals to external loads. Inside PLC, output

relay’s external output contactors (including relay contactors, transistor’s contactors) connect

with output terminals.

l The output relays have countless normally ON/OFF contactors, they can be used freely;

l The output relays which are not connected with external devices can be used as fast internal

relays;

Function

Execution Order

XC series PLC

CPU unit

Ex

ternal Sig

nal In

pu

t

Inp

ut T

ermin

al X

Ou

tpu

t Term

inal Y

Ex

ternal Sig

nal O

utp

ut

XC series PLC

CPU unit

Program

Dispose Area

External S

ignal Input

Input Term

inal X

Input Image A

rea

Output Im

age Area

Output T

erminal Y

External S

ignal Output

l Input Disposal

Ø Before PLC executing the program, read every input terminal’s ON/OFF status of PLC

to the image area.

Ø In the process of executing the program, even the input changed, the content in the input

image area will not change. However, in the input disposal of next scan cycle, read out

the change.

l Output Disposal

Ø Once finish executing all the instructions, transfer the ON/OFF status of output Y image

area to the output lock memory area. This will be the actual output of the PLC.

Ø The contacts used for the PLC’s external output will act according to the device’s

response delay time.

2-5．Auxiliary Relay (M)

The auxiliary relays M in XC series PLC are all in decimal form, please refer the details from

tables below:

RANGE

SERIES NAME FOR COMMON

USE

FOR POWER-OFF

RETENTIVE USE FOR SPECIAL USE

M8000~M8079

M8120~M8139

M8170~M8172

M8238~M8242

XC1 M M000~M199 M200~M319

M8350~M8370

RANGE


USE

FOR POWER-OFF


XC2 M M000~M2999 M3000~M7999 M8000~M8767

RANGE


USE

FOR POWER-OFF


XC3 M M000~M2999 M3000~M7999 M8000~M8767

SERIES NAME RANGE

Number List

FOR COMMON

USE

FOR POWER-OFF


XC5 M M000~M3999 M4000~M7999 M8000~M8767

RANGE


USE

FOR POWER-OFF


XCM M M000~M2999 M3000~M7999 M8000~M8767

In PLC, auxiliary relays M are used frequently. This type of relay’s coil is same with the output

relay. They are driven by soft components in PLC;

auxiliary relays M have countless normally ON/OFF contactors. They can be used freely, but this

type of contactors can’t drive the external loads.

l For common use

Ø This type of auxiliary relays can be used only as normal auxiliary relays. I.e. if power

supply suddenly stop during the running, the relays will disconnect.

Ø Common usage relays can’t be used for power off retentive, but the zone can be

modified;

l For Power Off Retentive Use

Ø The auxiliary relays for power off retentive usage, even the PLC is OFF, they can keep

the ON/OFF status before power OFF.

Ø Power off retentive zone can be modified by the user;

Ø Power off retentive relays are usually used to memory the status before stop the power,

then when power the PLC on again, the status can run again;

l For Special Usage

Ø Special relays refer some relays which are defined with special meanings or functions,

start from M8000.

Ø There are two types of usages for special relays, one type is used to drive the coil, the

other type is used to the specified execution;

E.g.: M8002 is the initial pulse, activates only at the moment of start

M8033 is “all output disabled”

Ø Special auxiliary relays can’t be used as normal relay M;

Function

2-6．Status Relay (S)

RANGE SERIES NAME

FOR COMMON USE FOR POWER-OFF RETENTIVE USE

XC1 S S000~S031 -

RANGE SERIES NAME


XC2 S S000~S511 S512~S1023

RANGE SERIES NAME


XC3 S S000~S511 S512~S1023

RANGE SERIES NAME


XC5 S S000~S511 S512~S1023

RANGE SERIES NAME


XCM S S000~S511 S512~S1023

l For common use

After shut off the PLC power, this type of relays will be OFF status;

l For Power Off Retentive Use

Ø The status relays for power off retentive usage, even the PLC is OFF, they can keep the

ON/OFF status before power OFF.

Ø Power off retentive zone can be modified by the user;

l The status relays also have countless “normally ON/OFF” contactors. So users can use them

freely in the program;

Address List

Function

XC series PLC’s status relays S are addressed in form of decimal; each

subfamily’s ID are listed below:

Status relays are very import in ladder program; usually use them with

instruction “STL”. In the form on flow, this can make the program’s structure

much clear and easy to modify;

2-7．Timer (T)

RANGE SERIES NAME

FOR COMMON USE POINTS






XC1 T


80







XC2

XC3

XC5

XCM

T

T600~T639: 1ms with precise time

640

We use OUT or TMR instruction to time for the normal timers. We use constant (K) to set the

value, or use data register (D) to indirect point the set value;

Address List

Function

Norm

al Typ

e

l If X0 is ON, then T200 accumulate

10ms clock pulse based on the current

value; when the accumulation value

reaches the set value K200, the timer’s

output contact activates. I.e. the output

contact activates 2s later. If X0 breaks,

the timer resets, the output contact

resets;

XC series PLC’s timers T are addressed in form of decimal; each

subfamily’s ID are listed below:

The timers accumulate the 1ms, 10ms, 10ms clock pulse, the output contactor

activates when the accumulation reaches the set value;

l Both OUT and TMR can realize the

time function. But if use OUT, the start

time is 0; if use TMR, the start time is 1

scan cycle

T10 K100X0

MOV K200 D5

T10 D5

X0

X1

Y0

T2

X0

Y0 X0

X0

Y0 T2K200

T2

Accu

mu

lation T

yp

e

If X001 is ON, then T300 accumulate

10ms clock pulse based on the current

value; when the accumulation value

reaches the set value K2000, the timer’s

output contact activates. I.e. the output

contact activates 2s later.

Even if X0 breaks, the timer will

continue to accumulation on re-starting.

The accumulation time is 20ms;

If X002 is ON, the timer will be reset,

the output contacts reset;

T10 is the timer with 100ms as the

unit. Specify 100 as the constant, then

0.1s*100=10s timer works;

Write the value of indirect

data register in the

program or input by value

switch.

If set as the retentive

register, make sure the

battery voltage is enough,

or the value will be

unstable.

《output delay OFF timer》

《Constant (K)》

《Register (D)》

When X000 is ON, output Y000;

When X000 from ON to OFF, delay T2(20s), then output Y000 is OFF.

Timer T0~T599 is 16 bits linear increment mode (0~K32767), when the timer’s

value reaches the max value K32767, it stops timing. The timer’s status keeps

still;

Specify the set

value

Timer Value

Action

Example

T1

T2

Y0

X0

T1

T2

X0

Y0

T1 T2 T1K10

K20

2-8．Counter ( C )

RANGE SERIES NAME

FOR COMMON USE POINTS




C620~C621

XC1 C

C630~C631

48





XC2

XC3

XC5

XCM

C


640

All the counters number meaning:

※1: Please see chapter 5 for high speed counter.

《glitter》

When X000 is ON, Y000 starts to glitter.

T1 controls the OFF time of Y000, T2 controls the ON time of Y000.

Number list

TYPE DESCRIPTION

16 bits forward counter C0~C299

32 bits forward/backward

counter

C300~C599 (C300,C302...C598)(each occupies 2 counters

number) the number should be even

HSC (High Speed

Counter)

C600~C634(C600,C602...C634)( (each occupies 2 counters

number) the number should be even

Counter

characteristics

XC series PLC counters’ number are all decimal, please see the following

table for all the counter numbers.

The characteristics of 16 bits and 32 bits counters:

Items 16 bits counter 32 bits counter

Count direction Positive Positive/negative

The set value 1~32,767 -2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647

The assigned set

value Constant K or data register

Same as the left, but data register must be in a

couple

Changing of the

current value Change after positive count Change after positive count (Loop counter)

Output contact Hold the action after

positive count

Hold the action after positive count, reset if

negative count

Reset activates When executing RST command, counter’s current value is 0, output contacts

recover

The current value

register 16 bits 32 bits

RST C0X0

C0 K10

Y0

X1

C0

Function

16 bits binary increment counters, the valid value is K1~K32,767 (decimal type

constant). The set value K0 and K1 has the same meaning. i.e. the output contact

works on the first count starts

If cut the PLC power supply, the normal

counter value become zero, the retentive

counter can store the value, it can

accumulate the value of last time.

l When X001 is ON once, the counter increases 1. When the counter value is 10,

its output is activated. After, when the X001 is ON again, the counter continues

increasing 1.

l If X000 is ON, reset counter, the counter value becomes zero.

l It also can set the counter value in D register. For example, D10=123 is the same

as K123.

16 bits counter normal/retentive type

The assignment of common use counters and power off retentive counters,

can me changed via FD parameters from peripheral devices;

RST C300X3

C300 K10

Y1

X4

C300

M8238X2

C0X001

K100

C300X001

K43,100

32 bits increase/decrease count range is +2147483648 ~ - 2147483647. Set the

increase or decrease count mode in M8238.

l If M8238=1, it is decrease mode;

M8238=0, it is increase mode.

l Set the count value in K or D, if set in D0

register, D0 and D1 will be seemed as one

32bits value.

l X004 is ON, C300 starts to count.

32

bits co

un

ter norm

al/retentiv

e type

l If X003 is ON, reset the counter and C300 output.

l If use retentive counter, the count value will be stored in PLC.

l 32 bits counter can be used as 32 bits register.

u 16 bits counter

《set as constant K》《set in D register》

u 32 bits counter

《set as constant K》《set in D register》

Set the count

value

MOV K100 D5

C0 D5

X000

X001

DMOV K43100 D0

C300 D0（D1）

X000

X001

It includes 16 bits and 32 bits count value.

C0~C299 are 16 bits linear increase counter (0~32767), when the counter value reaches

32767, it will stop count and keep the state.

C300~C599 are 32 bits linear increase/decrease counter (-2147483648~+2147483647), when

the counter value reaches 2147483647, it will become -2147483648, when the counter value

reaches -2147483648, it will become 2147483647, the counter state will change as the count

value.

2-9．Data register ( D)

RANGE


USE

FOR POWER OFF


D8000~D8029

D8060~D8079

D8120~D8179

D8240~D8249

D8306~D8313

XC1 D D0~D99 D100~D149

D8460~D8469

138

D8000~D8511 XC2 D D0~D999 D4000~D4999

D8630~D8729 612

XC3

XC5 D D0~D3999 D4000~D7999 D8000~D9023 1024

XCM D D0~D2999 D3000~D4999 D8000~D9023 1024

Count value

Address list

Structure

XC series PLC data register D address is shown as below:

Data register is soft element which used to store data, it includes 16 bits and

32 bits. ( 32 bits contains two registers, the highest bit is sign bit )

l Normal type

Ø When write a new value in the register, the former value will be covered.

Ø When PLC from RUN to STOP or STOP to RUN, the value in the register will be

cleared.

l Retentive type

Sign bit

b 0

D 0 ( 16 bits )

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 b 15

0 ： positive 1 ： negative

Sign bit

b 0

D 1 ( 16 bits )

0 0 0 0 1 01 00 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

b 31

0 ： positive 1 ： negative

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

D 0 (16 bits ) Low

bit

High

bit

16

bits

16 bits register range is -32,768 ~ +32,767

Use the applied instruction to read and write the register data. Or use other

devices such as HMI.

32 bits

32 bits value is consisted of two registers. The range is -2147483648 ~ 2147483647.

When appoint the 32bits register, if set D0, the PLC will connect the next register D1 as

the high bits. Generally, we often appoint even address register.

Function

Ø When PLC from RUN to STOP or power off, the value in the register will be retained.

Ø The retentive register range can be set by user.

l Special type

Ø Special register is used to set special data, or occupied by the system.

Ø Some special registers are initialized when PLC is power on.

Ø Please refer to the appendix for the special register address and function.

l Used as offset (indirect appoint)

Ø Data register can be used as offset of soft element.

Ø Format : Dn[Dm]、Xn[Dm]、Yn[Dm]、Mn[Dm].

Ø Word offset: DXn[Dm] means DX[n+Dm].

Ø The offset value only can be set as D register.

MOV D10[D0] D100M8000

M2

Y0[D0]

MOV K5 D0

M8002MOV K0 D0

When D0=0, D100=D10, Y0 is ON;

When M2 is from OFF→ON, D0=5, D100=D15, Y5 is ON.

D10[D0]=D[10+D0], Y0[D0]=Y[0+D0].

l Data storage

MOV K100 D0M0

M1DMOV K41100 D10

l Data transfer

MOV D0 D10M0

l Read the timer and counter

MOV C10 D0M0

Example

When M0 is ON, write 100 into D0.(16 bits value)

When M1 is ON, write 41100 into D11,D10 (32bits value)

When M0 is ON, transfer the value of D10 to D0

When M0 is ON, move the value of C10 to D0.

Data register D can deal with many kinds of data and realize various controls.

l As the set value of timer and counter

C300 D1

X0

X1

T10 D0

↑

2-10．Constant

l DEC: DECIMAL NUMBER

Ø The preset number of counter and timer ( constant K)

Ø The number of Auxiliary relay M, timer T, counter C, state S.

Ø Set as the operand value and action of applied instruction (constant K)

l HEX: HEXADECIMAL NUMBER

Ø Set as the operand value and action of applied instruction (constant K)

l BIN: BINARY NUMBER

Ø Inside the PLC, all the numbers will be processed by binary. But when monitoring on

the device, all the binary will be transformed into HEX or DEC.

l OCT: OCTAL NUMBER

Ø XC series PLC I/O relays are addressed in OCT. Such as [0-7, 10-17,….70-77,100-107].

When X0 is ON, T10 starts to work, the time is set in D0.

When X1 is ON once, C300 increase 1, when C300 value=D1,

C300 coil outputs.

Data process XC series PLC use the following 5 number systems.

l BCD: BINARY CODE DECIMAL

Ø BCD uses 4 bits binary number to display decimal number 0-9. BCD can be used in 7

segments LED and BCD output digital switch

l Other numbers ( float number)

XC series PLC can calculate high precision float numbers. It is calculated by binary

numbers, and display by decimal numbers.

l Constant K

K is used to display decimal numbers. K10 means decimal number 10. It is used to set timer and

counter value, operand value of applied instruction.

l Constant H

H is used to display hex numbers. H10 means hex number 10. It is used to set operand value of

applied instruction.

2-11．PROGRAM PRINCIPLE

l Tag P、I

Tag P、I are used in branch division and interruption.

Tag for branch (P) is used in condition jump or subroutine’s jump target;

Tag for interruption (I) is used to specify the e input interruption, time interruption;

The tags P、I are both in decimal form, each coding principle is listed below:

SERIES NAME RANGE

XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM P P0~P9999

RANGE

FOR EXTERNAL

INTERRUPTION SERIES NAME

Input

terminals

Rising edge

interruption

Falling

edge

interruption

For time interruption

X2 I0000 I0001

X5 I0100 I0101 XC2 I

X10 I0200 I0201

There are 10 channels time interruption,

the represent method is: I40**~I49**.

(“**” represents interruption time, the unit

is mm)

Display PLC program should use K, H to process values. K means decimal

numbers, H means hex numbers. Please note the PLC input/output relay use

octal address.

RANGE

FOR EXTERNAL

INTERRUPTION SERIES NAME I/O

Input

terminals

Rising

edge

interruption

Falling

edge

interruption


14 X7 I0000 I0001

X2 I0000 I0001

X5 I0100 I0101 24

32 X10 I0200 I0201

X10 I0000 I0001

X7 I0100 I0101

XC3 I

19

48

60 X6 I0200 I0201



(“**” represents interruption time, the

unit is mm)

RANGE

FOR EXTERNAL


Input

terminals

Rising

edge

interruption

Falling

edge

interruption


X2 I0000 I0001

X5 I0100 I0101

X10 I0200 I0201

X11 I0300 I0301

24

32

X12 I0400 I0401

X2 I0000 I0001

X5 I0100 I0101

XC5 I

48

60 X10 I0200 I0201




unit is mm)

RANGE

FOR EXTERNAL


Input

terminals

Rising

edge

interruption

Falling

edge

interruption


X2 I0000 I0001 XCM I 24

32 X5 I0100 I0101



X10 I0200 I0201

X11 I0300 I0301

X12 I0400 I0401


unit is mm)

Tag P is usually used in flow, it is used with CJ (condition jump)、CALL (subroutine

call)etc.

l Condition Jump CJ

X0

CJ

X1

X2

P1

T0RST

Y0

P1

l Call the subroutine (CALL)

CALLX0

FEND

SRET

P10

P10

Tag I is usually used in interruption, including external interruption, time interruption etc.

use with IRET (interruption return)、EI (enable interruption)、DI (disable interruption);

l External interruption

Ø Accept the input signal from the special input terminals, not effected by the scan

cycle. Activate the input signal, execute the interruption subroutine.

Ø With external interruption, PLC can dispose the signal shorter than scan cycle;

So it can be used as essential priority disposal in sequence control, or used in

short time pulse control.

l Time interruption

Ø Execute the interruption subroutine at each specified interruption loop tine. Use

Tag P

If coil X0 gets ON, jump to the step behind

tag P1;

If the coil X0 is not ON, do not execute

jump action, but run with the original

program;

If X0 gets ON, jump to the

subroutine from the main program;

If the coil is not ON, run with the

original program;

After executing the subroutine,

return to the main program; T

ag I

Main program

Subroutine

this interruption in the control which requires it to be different with PLC’s

operation cycle;

l Action order of input/output relays and response delay

Ø Input disposal

Before PLC executing the program, read all the input terminal’s ON/OFF status of PLC

to the image area. In the process of executing the program, even the input changed, the

content in the input image area will not change. However, in the input disposal of next

scan cycle, read out the change.

Ø Output disposal

Once finish executing all the instructions, transfer the ON/OFF status of output Y image

area to the output lock memory area. This will be the actual output of the PLC. The

contacts used for the PLC’s exterior output will act according to the device’s response

delay time.

When use this input/output format in a batch, the drive time and operation cycle of input filter

and output device will also appear response delay.

l Not accept narrow input pulse signal

PLC’s input ON/OFF time should be longer than its loop time. If consider input filter’s response

delay 10ms, loop time is 10ms，then ON/OFF time needs 20 ms separately. So, up to 1，

000/(20+20)=25Hz input pulse can’t be disposed. But, this condition could be improved when use

PLC’s special function and applied instructions.

l Dual output（Dual coils）action

Y3

Y4

Y3

X1

Y3

X2

As shown in the left map, please consider

the things of using the same coil Y003 at

many positions:

E.g. X001=ON，X002=OFF

At first, X001 is ON, its image area is ON,

output Y004 is also ON.

But, as input X002 is OFF, the image area

of Y003 is OFF.

So, the actual output is: Y003=OFF,

Y004= ON.

When executing dual output (use dual coil),

the back side act in prior.

3 Basic Program Instructions

In this chapter, we tell the basic instructions and their functions.

3-1．Basic Instructions List

3-2．[LD], [LDI], [OUT]

3-3．[AND], [ANI]

3-4．[OR], [ORI]

3-5．[LDP], [LDF], [ANDP], [ANDF], [ORP], [ORF]

3-6．[LDD], [LDDI]

3-7．[ORB]

3-8．[ANB]

3-9．[MCS], [MCR]

3-10．[ALT]

3-11．[PLS], [PLF]

3-12．[SET], [RST]

3-13．[OUT], [RST] (Aim at counter device)

3-14．[NOP], [END]

3-15．[GROUP], [GROUPE]

3-16．Items to be attended when programming

3-1．Basic Instructions List

All XC1、XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM series support the below instructions:

Mnemonic Function Format and Device Chapter

LD

(LoaD)

Initial logical operation

contact type NO (normally

open)

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

3-2

LDD

(LoaD

Directly)

Read the status from the

contact directly

X0

D

X

3-6

LDI

(LoaD

Inverse)


contact type NC (normally

closed)


3-2

LDDI Read the normally closed

contact directly

X0

D

X

3-6

LDP

(LoaD

Pulse)

Initial logical

operation-Rising edge

pulse


3-5

LDF

(LoaD

Falling

Pulse)

Initial logical

operation-Falling /trailing

edge pulse


3-5

AND

(AND)

Serial connection of NO

(normally open) contacts

M0


3-3

ANDD Read the status from the

contact directly

X0

D

X

3-6

ANI

(AND

Inverse)

Serial connection of NC

(normally closed) contacts

M0


3-3

ANDDI Read the normally closed

contact directly

X0

D

X

3-6

ANDP

(AND

Pulse)

Serial connection of rising

edge pulse


3-5

ANDF

(AND

Falling

pulse)

Serial connection of

falling/trailing edge pulse


3-5

OR

(OR)

Parallel connection of NO

(normally open) contacts


3-4

ORD Read the status from the

contact directly X0

D

X

3-6

ORI

(OR

Inverse)

Parallel connection of NC

(normally closed) contacts


3-4

ORDI Read the normally closed

contact directly X0

D

X

3-6

ORP

(OR

Pulse)

Parallel connection of

rising edge pulse


3-5

ORF

(OR

Falling

pulse)


falling/trailing edge pulse


3-5

ANB

(ANd

Block)


multiply parallel circuits

None

3-8

ORB

(OR

Block)


multiply parallel circuits

None

3-7

OUT

(OUT)

Final logic operation type

coil drive Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

3-2

OUTD Output to the contact

directly

Y0

D

Y

3-6

SET

(SET)

Set a bit device

permanently ON

Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

3-12

RST

(ReSeT)

Reset a bit device

permanently OFF

Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

3-12

PLS

(PuLSe)

Rising edge pulse

X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

3-11

PLF

(PuLse

Falling)

Falling/trailing edge pulse


3-11

MCS

(New bus

line start)

Connect the public serial

contacts

Y0

None

3-9

MCR

(Bus line

return)

Clear the public serial

contacts

Y0

None

3-9

ALT

(Alternate

state)

The status of the assigned

device is inverted on every

operation of the instruction

M0ALT


3-10

END

(END)

Force the current program

scan to end None

3-14

GROUP Group

None

3-15

GROUPE Group End

None

3-15

TMR Time

2-7

3-2．[LD] , [LDI] , [OUT]

Mnemonic Function Format and Operands

LD

(LoaD)

Initial logic operation

contact type NO

(Normally Open)

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、

Dn.m、FDn.m

LDI

(LoaD Inverse)

Initial logic operation

contact type NC

(Normally Closed)

Devices：X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、

FDn.m

OUT

(OUT)

Final logic operation

type drive coil Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、

Dn.m

Timer, Counter Setting Range of constant K The actual setting value

1ms Timer 0.001～32.767 sec

10ms Timer 0.01～327.67 sec

100ms Timer

1～32,767

0.1～3276.7 sec

16 bits counter 1～32,767 Same as the left

l Connect the LD and LDI instructions directly to the left bus bar. Or use them

to define a new block of program when using ANB instruction.

l OUT instruction is the coil drive instruction for the output relays、auxiliary

relays、status、timers、counters. But this instruction can’t be used for the

input relays

l Can not sequentially use parallel OUT command for many times.

l For the timer’s time coil or counter’s count coil, after using OUT instruction,

set constant K is necessary.

l For the constant K’s setting range、actual timer constant、program’s step

relative to OUT instruction (include the setting value), See table below:

Mnemonic and Function

Statement

Y100

M1203

T 0

X0

Y 1

X1

T0

K19

3-3．[AND] , [ANI]

32 bits counter 1～2,147,483,647 Same as the left


AND

(AND)


NO (Normally

Open) contacts

M0

Operands: X、Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m、FDn.m

ANI

(ANd

Inverse)


NC (Normally

Closed) contacts

M0


LD X0

OUT Y100

LDI X1

OUT M1203

OUT T0 K19

LD T0

OUT Y1

Program

Statements

l Use the AND and the ANI instruction for serial connection of contacts. As

many contacts as required can be connected in series. They can be used for

many times.

l The output processing to a coil, through writing the initial OUT instruction is

called a “follow-on” output (For an example see the program below: OUT M2

and OUT Y003). Follow-on outputs are permitted repeatedly as long as the

output order is correct. There’s no limit for the serial connected contacts’ Nr.

and follow-on outputs’ number.


Y2

M2

Y3

X2 M1

X3Y2

T1

3-4．[OR] , [ORI]

Y6

M100

X5

X6

M11

Y6 M4 X7

M12

M13


OR

(OR)

Parallel connection

of NO (Normally

Open) contacts


ORI

(OR

Inverse)

Parallel connection

of NC (Normally

Closed) contacts


Program

LD X2

AND M1

OUT Y2

LD Y2

ANI X3

OUT M2

AND T1

OUT Y3


Statements

Program

LD X5

OR X6

OR M11

OUT Y6

LDI Y6

AND M4

OR M12

ANI X7

OR M13

OUT M100

l Use the OR and ORI instructions for parallel connection of contacts. To connect a block

that contains more than one contact connected in series to another circuit block in parallel,

use an ORB instruction, which will be described later;

l OR and ORI start from the instruction’s step, parallel connect with the LD and LDI

instruction’s step said before. There is no limit for the parallel connect times.

3-5．[LDP] , [LDF] , [ANDP] , [ANDF] , [ORP] , [ORF]


LDP

(LoaD

Pulse)

Initial logical

operation-Rising edge

pulse


LDF

(LoaD

Falling

pulse)




ANDP

(AND

Pulse)


Rising edge pulse


ANDF

(AND

Falling

pulse)




ORP

(OR

Pulse)


Rising edge pulse


ORF

(OR

Falling

pulse)




The parallel connection with OR, ORI

instructions should connect with LD, LDI

instructions in principle. But behind the

ANB instruction, it’s still ok to add a LD

or LDI instruction.

Relationship with ANB


3-6．[LDD] , [LDDI] , [ANDD] , [ANDDI] , [ORD] , [ORDI]，[OUTD]


LDD Read the status from the

contact directly

X0

D

Devices: X

LDDI Read the normally closed

contact directly

X0

D

Devices: X

ANDD Read the status from the

contact directly

X0

D

Devices: X

ANDDI Read the normally

closed contact directly

X0

D

Devices: X

ORD Read the status from the

contact directly X0

D

l LDP、ANDP、ORP are active for one program scan after the associated devices switch from

OFF to ON.

l LDF、ANDF、ORF are active for one program scan after the associated devices switch from

ON to OFF.

M13

M15

X5

X6

M8000 X7

LDP X5

ORP X6

OUT M13

LD M8000

ANDP X7

OUT M15

Statements

Program


l The function of LDD、ANDD、ORD instructions are similar with LD、AND、OR; LDDI、

ANDDI、ORDI instructions are similar with LDI、ANDI、ORI; but if the operand is X, the

LDD、ANDD、ORD commands read the signal from the terminals directly, this is the only

difference.

l OUTD and OUT are output instructions. But if use OUTD, output immediately if the

condition comes true, needn't wait the next scan cycle.

M13X0

X1

X2D

D

DY0D

3-7．[ORB]

Mnemonic Function Format and Devices

ORB

(OR Block)

Parallel connection

of multiply parallel

circuits

Devices: none

Devices: X

ORDI Read the normally

closed contact directly X0

D

Devices: X

OUTD Output to the contact

directly

Y0

D

Devices: Y

LDD X0

LDDI X2

ORD X2

ANB

OUTD Y0

Program

Statements


l The serial connection with two or more contacts is called "serial block". If parallel connect

the serial block, use LD, LDI at the branch start place, use ORB at the stop place;

l As the ANB instruction，an ORB instruction is an independent instruction and is not

associated with any device number.

l There are no limitations to the number of parallel circuits when using an ORB instruction in

the sequential processing configuration.

Recommended good

programming method：

LD X0

AND X1

LD X2

AND X3

ORB

LD X4

AND X5

ORB

Non-preferred batch

programming

method：

LD X0

AND X1

LD X2

AND X3

LD X4

AND X5

ORB

ORB

Statements

Program

3-8．[ANB]


ANB

(And

Block)

Serial

connection of

multiply

parallel circuits

Devices: none

Start of a branch

End of a parallel circuit block

Serial connect with the preceding circuit

l To declare the starting point of the circuit block, use a LD or LDI

instruction. After completing the parallel circuit block, connect it to the

preceding block in series using the ANB instruction.

l It is possible to use as many ANB instructions as necessary to connect a

number of parallel circuit blocks to the preceding block in series.

LD X0

OR X1

LD X2

AND X3

LDI X4

AND X5

ORB

OR X6

ANB

OR X7

OUT Y20

Statements

Program


3-9．[MCS] , [MCR]


MCS

(Master

control)

Denotes the

start of a

master control

block

Y0

Devices：None

MCR

(Master

control

Reset)

Denotes the

end of a master

control block

Y0

Devices：None

X1 X2

M2

M3M1

Y0

Y1

Y2

l After the execution of an MCS instruction, the bus line（LD、LDI）shifts

to a point after the MCS instruction. An MCR instruction returns this to

the original bus line.

l MCS、MCR instructions should use in pair.

l The bus line could be used nesting. Between the matched MCS、MCR

instructions use matched MCS、MCR instructions. The nest level

increase with the using of MCS instruction. The max nest level is 10.

When executing MCR instruction, go back to the upper bus line.

l When use flow program, bus line management could only be used in the

same flow. When end some flow, it must go back to the main bus line.

LD X1

MCS

LD X2

OUT Y0

LD M1

MCS

LD M3

OUT Y1

LD M2

OUT Y2

MCR

MCR

Bus line starts

Bus line nest

Bus line back

Statements

Program


3-10．[ALT]


ALT

(Alternate

status)

The status of the

assigned devices

inverted on every

operation of the

instruction

M0ALT

Devices： Y、M、S、T、C、Dn.m

M0ALT

M0Y0

M100

Y1M0

3-11．[PLS] , [PLF]


PLS

(Pulse)

Rising edge

pulse


PLF

(Pulse

Falling)

Falling/trailing

edge pulse


The status of the destination device is alternated on every operation of the

ALT instruction.

LDP M100

ALT M0

LD M0

OUT Y0

LDI M0

OUT Y1

Statements

Program



X0PLS M0

M0SET Y0

X1PLF M1

M1RST Y0

3-12．[SET] , [RST]


SET（Set） Set a bit device

permanently

ON


RST(Reset) Reset a bit

device

permanently

OFF


l When a PLS instruction is executed, object devices Y and M operate

for one operation cycle after the drive input signal has turned ON.

l When a PLF instruction is executed, object devices Y and M operate

for one operation cycle after the drive input signal has turned OFF.

LD X0

PLS M0

LD M0

SET Y0

----------------------

LD X1

PLF M1

LD M1

RST Y0

Statements

Program


X10SET Y0

X11RST Y0

X12SET M50

X13RST M50

X14SET S0

X15RST S0

X10T250

K10

X17RST T250

X10

X11

Y0

LD X10

SET Y0

LD X11

RST Y0

LD X12

SET M50

LD X13

RST M50

LD X14

SET S0

LD X15

RST S0

LD X10

OUT T250 K10

LD X17

RST T250

l Turning ON X010 causes Y000 to turn ON. Y000 remains ON even after

X010 turns OFF. Turning ON X011 causes Y000 to turn OFF. Y000

remains OFF even after X011 turns OFF. It’s the same with M、S.

l SET and RST instructions can be used for the same device as many times

as necessary. However, the last instruction activated determines the

current status.

l Besides, it’s also possible to use RST instruction to reset the current

contents of timer, counter and contacts.

l When use SET, RST commands, avoid to use the same ID with OUT

command;

Statements

Program

3-13．【OUT】,【RST】for the counters


OUT Final logic

operation type

coil drive

Device：K、D

RST Reset a bit device

permanently OFF

Device：C

C0 carries on increase count for the

OFF→ON of X011. When reach the

set value K10, output contact C0

activates. Afterwards, even X011 turns

from OFF to ON, counter’s current

value will not change, output contact

keep on activating.

To clear this, let X010 be the activate

status and reset the output contact. It’s

necessary to assign constant K or

indirect data register’s ID behind OUT

instruction.

l In the preceding example, when M0 is ON, carry on positive count with OFF→ON

of X0.

l Counter’s current value increase, when reach the set value (K or D), the output

contact is reset.

l When M1 is ON, counter’s C600 output contact is reset, counter’s current value turns

to be 0.

Programming of

interior counter

Programmi

ng of high

speed


Counter used for power cut retentive.

Even when power is cut, hold the current

value and output contact’s action status

and reset status.

3-14． [END]

Mnemonic Function Format and Devices：None

END

(END)

Force the

current

program scan

to end

Devices: None

When executing END instruction, refresh monitor timer. (Check if scan cycle is a long timer.)

PLC repeatedly carry on input disposal, program

executing and output disposal. If write END

instruction at the end of the program, then the

instructions behind END instruction won’t be

executed. If there’s no END instruction in the

program, the PLC executes the end step and then

repeat executing the program from step 0.

When debug, insert END in each program

segment to check out each program’s action.

Then, after confirm the correction of preceding

block’s action, delete END instruction.

Besides, the first execution of RUN begins with

END instruction.

Statements


3-15．[GROUP] , [GROUPE]

Mnemonic Function Format and Device

GROUP GROUP

Devices: None

GROUPE GROUP END

Devices: None

l GROUP and GROUPE should used in pairs.

l GROUP and GROUPE don't have practical meaning, they are used to optimize the program

structure. So, add or delete these instructions doesn't effect the program's running;

l The using method of GROUP and GROUPE is similar with flow instructions; enter GROUP

instruction at the beginning of group part; enter GROUPE instruction at the end of group

part.

Generally, GROUP and GROUPE

instruction can be programmed according to

the group's function. Meantime, the

programmed instructions can be FOLDED or

UNFOLDED. To a redundant project, these

two instructions are quite useful.

Statements


3-16．Items To Note When Programming

1、Contacts’ structure and step number

Even in the sequencial control circuit with the same action, it’s also available to

simple the program and save program’s steps according to the contacts’ structure.

General program principle is：a）write the circuit with many serial contacts on the top；

b）write the circuit with many parallel contacts in the left.

2、Program’s executing sequence

Handle the sequencial control program by【From top to bottom】and【From left to

right】

Sequencial control instructions also encode following this flow.

3、Dual output dual coil’s activation and the solution

l If carry on coil’s dual output (dual coil) in the sequencial control program, then

the backward action is prior.

l Dual output (dual coil) doesn’t go against the input rule at the program side. But

as the preceding action is very complicate, please modify the program as in the

following example.

Y0

Y0

X0 X2

X3 X4

Y0X0 X2

X3 X4

M0

M1

X0 X2

X3 X4

Y0M0

M1

There are other methods. E.g. jump instructions or step ladder. However, when use

step ladder, if the main program’s output coil is programmed, then the disposal

method is the same with dual coil, please note this.

4 applied instructions

4 Applied Instructions In this chapter, we describe applied instruction’s function of XC series PLC.

4-1．Table of Applied Instructions

4-2．Reading Method of Applied Instructions

4-3．Flow Instructions

4-4．Contactors Compare Instructions

4-5．Move Instructions

4-6．Arithmetic and Logic Operation Instructions

4-7．Loop and Shift Instructions

4-8．Data Convert

4-9．Floating Operation

4-10．Clock Operation



4-1．Applied Instruction List

Mnemonic Function Ladder chart Chapter

Program Flow

CJ Condition jump CJ Pn

4-3-1

CALL Call subroutine CALL Pn

4-3-2

SRET Subroutine return SRET

4-3-2

STL Flow start STL Sn

4-3-3

STLE Flow end S 1 ·

4-3-3

SET Open the assigned flow, close

the current flow S ·

4-3-3

ST Open the assigned flow, not

close the current flow D ·

4-3-3

FOR Start a FOR-NEXT loop D ·

4-3-4

NEXT End of a FOR-NEXT loop D ·

4-3-4

FEND Main program END D ·

4-3-5

END Program END

4-3-5

Data Compare

LD＝ LD activates if (S1) = (S2) S ·

4-4-1

LD＞ LD activates if (S1) > (S2) D ·

4-4-1

LD＜ LD activates if (S1) =< (S2) D ·

4-4-1

LD＜＞ LD activates if（S1）≠（S2） D ·

4-4-1

LD＜＝ LD activates if（S1）≤（S2） D ·

4-4-1

LD＞＝ LD activates if（S1）≥（S2） LD＞= S1 S2

4-4-1

AND＝ AND activates if（S1）＝（S2） AND＝ S1 S2

4-4-2


AND＞ AND activates if（S1）＞（S2） AND> S1 S2

4-4-2

AND＜ AND activates if（S1）＜（S2） AND< S1 S2

4-4-2

AND＜＞ AND activates if（S1）≠（S2） AND<> S1 S2

4-4-2

AND＜＝ AND activates if（S1）≤（S2） AND<＝ S1 S2

4-4-2

AND＞＝ AND activates if（S1）≥（S2） B M O V D 1 0 D 1 1 K 3

B M O V D 1 0 D 9 K 3X 1

X 2

4-4-2

OR＝ OR activates if（S1）＝（S2） OR= S1 S2

4-4-3

OR＞ OR activates if（S1）＞（S2） PMOV D5 D10 K3

X0nS· D·

4-4-3

OR＜ OR activates if（S1）＜（S2） OR＜ S1 S2

4-4-3

OR＜＞ OR activates if（S1）≠（S2） OR＜＞ S1 S2

4-4-3

OR＜＝ OR activates if（S1）≤（S2） DFMOV D0 D10 K3

X0nS· D·

4-4-3

OR＞＝ OR activates if（S1）≥（S2） OR＞= S1 S2

4-4-3

Data Move

CMP Compare the data CMP S1 S D

4-5-1

ZCP Compare the data in certain area D 0F W R T F D 0X 2

K 3

S · D 1 · D 2 ·

4-5-2

MOV Move MOV S D

4-5-3

BMOV Block move M S E T M 1 0 M 1 2 0

D 1 · D 2 ·X 0

4-5-4

PMOV Transfer the Data block D 2 ·

4-5-5

FMOV Multi-points repeat move D 1 ·

4-5-6

FWRT Flash ROM written D 2 ·

4-5-7

MSET Zone set D 1 ·

4-5-8

ZRST Zone reset D 2 ·

4-5-9

SWAP Swap the high and low byte D 1 ·

4-5-10


XCH Exchange two values Z R S T M 5 0 0 M 5 5 9

D 0 D 1 0 0

D 1 · D 2 ·

D 1 · D 2 ·

X 0

Z R S T 4-5-11

EMOV Float move

4-5-12

Data Operation

ADD Addition D 2 ·

4-6-1

SUB Subtraction D 1 ·

4-6-2

MUL Multiplication D 2 ·

4-6-3

DIV Division D 1 ·

4-6-4

INC Increment D 1 ·

4-6-5

DEC Decrement D 2 ·

4-6-5

MEAN Mean D 1 ·

4-6-6

WAND Word And WAND S1 S2 D

4-6-7

WOR Word OR WOR S1 S2 D

4-6-7

WXOR Word exclusive OR WXOR S1 S2 D

4-6-7

CML Compliment CML S D

4-6-8

NEG Negative

4-6-9

Data Shift

SHL Arithmetic Shift Left SHL D n

4-7-1

SHR Arithmetic Shift Right SHR D n

4-7-1

LSL Logic shift left

4-7-2

LSR Logic shift right

4-7-2

ROL Rotation shift left

4-7-3

ROR Rotation shift right

4-7-3


SFTL Bit shift left SFTL S D n1 n2

4-7-4

SFTR Bit shift right SFTR S D n1 n2

4-7-5

WSFL Word shift left

4-7-6

WSFR Word shift right

4-7-7

Data Convert

WTD Single word integer converts

to double word integer WTD S D

4-8-1

FLT 16 bits integer converts to

float point 4-8-2

DFLT 32 bits integer converts to float point

4-8-2

FLTD 64 bits integer converts to

float point 4-8-2

INT Float point converts to integer

4-8-3

BIN BCD converts to binary

4-8-4

BCD Binary converts to BCD

4-8-5

ASCI Hex. converts to ASCII ASCI S D n

4-8-6

HEX ASCII converts to Hex.

4-8-7

DECO Coding

4-8-8

ENCO High bit coding

4-8-9

ENCOL Low bit coding

4-8-10

Float Point Operation

ECMP Float compare ECMP S1 S2 D

4-9-1

EZCP Float Zone compare EZCP S1 S2 D1 D2

4-9-2


EADD Float Add

4-9-3

ESUB Float Subtract

4-9-4

EMUL Float Multiplication

4-9-5

EDIV Float division

4-9-6

ESQR Float Square Root

4-9-7

SIN Sine

4-9-8

COS Cosine

4-9-9

TAN Tangent

4-9-10

ASIN Floating Sine

4-9-11

ACOS Floating Cosine

4-9-12

ATAN Floating Tangent

4-9-13

Clock Operation

TRD Read RTC data

4-10-1

TWR Write RTC data

4-10-2


4-2．Reading Method of Applied Instructions In this manual, the applied instructions are described in the following manner. 1.Summary

ADDITION [ADD]

16 bits ADD 32 bits DADD

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, Rising/Falling

edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2.Operands

Operands Function Data Type

S1 Specify the augend data or register 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

S2 Specify the summand data or register 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D Specify the register to store the sum 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

3.Suitable Soft Components

<16 bits instruction>

ADD D10 D12 D14X0

S1· S2· D·


DADD D10 D12 D14X0

S1· S2· D·

Word operands System Constant Module

D FD ED TD CD DX DY DM DS K /H ID QD

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

Description

（D10）＋（D12）→（D14）

（D11D10）＋（D13D12）→（D15D14）


The data contained within the two source devices are combined and total is stored in the specified

destination device. Each data’s highest bit is the sign bit, 0 stands for positive, 1 stand for negative. All

calculations are algebraic processed. (5+(-8)= -3).

If the result of a calculations is “0”, the “0’ flag acts. If the result exceeds 323,767(16 bits limit) or

2,147,483,648 ( 32 bits limit), the carry flag acts. ( refer to the next page). If the result exceeds -323,768 (16

bits limit) or -2,147,483,648 (32 bits limit ) , the borrow flag acts (Refer to the next page)

When carry on 32 bits operation, word device’s 16 bits are assigned, the device follow closely the preceding

device’s ID will be the high bits. To avoid ID repetition, we recommend you assign device’s ID to be even

ID.

The same device may be used a source and a destination. If this is the case then the result changes after

every scan cycle. Please note this point.

Flag Name Function

M8020 Zero ON：the calculate result is zero

OFF：the calculate result is not zero

M8021 Borrow

ON：the calculate result is over 32767(16bits) or 2147483647(32bits)

OFF：the calculate result is not over 32767(16bits) or 2147483647(32bits)

M8022 Carry

ON：the calculate result is over 32767(16bits) or 2147483647(32bits)

OFF：the calculate result is not over 32767(16bits) or 2147483647(32bits)

Instruction D(NUM) Object data

Related flag

The assignment of the data The data register of XC series PLC is a single word (16 bit) data register, single word data only engross one data register which is assigned by single word object instruction. The disposal bound is: Dec. –327,68~327,67, Hex. 0000~FFFF.

The related

description

D(NUM) Single word object instruction

→

Double word（32 bit）engrosses two data register, it’s composed by two consecutive data registers, the first one is assigned by double word object instruction. The dispose bound is: Dec. -214,748,364,8~214,748,364,7, Hex. 00000000~FFFFFFFF.


Instruction D(NUM) Object data Object data

※1：Flag after executing the instruction. Instructions without the direct flag will not display. ※2： Source operand, its content won’t change after executing the instruction

※3： Destinate operand, its content changes with the execution of the instruction ※4：Tell the instruction’s basic action, using way, applied example, extend function, note items etc. 4-3．Program Flow Instructions

Mnemonic Instruction’s name Chapter CJ Condition Jump 4-3-1 CALL Call subroutine 4-3-2 SRET Subroutine return 4-3-2 STL Flow start 4-3-3 STLE Flow end 4-3-3 SET Open the assigned flow, close the current flow (flow

jump) 4-3-3

ST Open the assigned flow, not close the current flow (Open the new flow)

4-3-3

FOR Start of a FOR-NEXT loop 4-3-4 NEXT End of a FOR-NEXT loop 4-3-4 FEND First End 4-3-5 END Program End 4-3-5

D(NUM+1) D(NUM) Double word object instruction

→

The denote way of 32 bits instruction If an instruction can not only be 16 bits but also be 32 bits, then the denote method for 32 bits instruction is to add a “D” before 16 bits instruction. E.g：ADD D0 D2 D4 denotes two 16 bits data adds；

DADD D10 D12 D14 denotes two 32 bits data adds

S·

D·


4-3-1．Condition Jump [CJ] 1.Summary

As used to run a part of program, CJ shorten the operation cycle and using the dual coil Condition Jump [CJ] 16 bits CJ 32 bits - Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2.Operands


Pn Jump to the target (with pointer Nr.) P (P0~P9999) Pointer's Nr. 3.Suitable Soft Components

In the below graph, if X000 is “ON”, jump from the first step to the next step behind P6 tag. If X000 “OFF”, do not execute the jump construction;

Pointer

P I

●

Other

Description


CJ

Y0

X0

X1

X3

X4

X0

RST

T246 K1000

MOV

CJ

X2

X5

X6

P6

T246

K3 D0

P7

T246RST

Y0

P6

P7

4-3-2．Call subroutine [CALL] and Subroutine return [SRET]

1.Summary Call the programs which need to be executed together, decrease the program's steps;

Subroutine Call [CALL] 16 bits CALL 32 bits - Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, Rising/Falling edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Subroutine Return [SRET] 16 bits SRET 32 bits - Execution

condition

- Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2.Operands


Pn Jump to the target (with pointer Nr.) P (P0~P9999) Pointer's Nr. 3.Suitable Soft Components

In the left graph, Y000 becomes to be dual coil output, but when X000=OFF, X001 activates; when X000=ON, X005 activates

CJ can’t jump from one STL to another STL;

After driving time T0~T640 and HSC C600~C640, if execute CJ, continue to work, the output activates.


CALLX0

FEND

SRET

END

P10

P10

4-3-3．Flow [SET].[ST] .[STL]. [STLE]

1、Summary Instructions to specify the start, end, open, close of a flow;

Open the specified flow, close the local flow [SET] 16 bits SET 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Open the specified flow, not close the local flow [ST] 16 bits ST 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Flow starts [STL] 16 bits STL 32 bits -

Others Pointer

P I

●

Main Program

Subroutine

If X000= “ON”, execute the call instruction and jump to the step tagged by P10. after executing the subroutine, return the original step via SRET instruction.Program the tag with FEND instruction (will describe this instruction later)

In the subroutine 9 times call is allowed, so totally there can be 10 nestings.

Description


Execution

condition

- Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Flow ends [STLE] 16 bits STLE 32 bits - Execution

condition

- Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2.operands


Sn Jump to the target flow S Flow ID 3.Suitable Soft Components

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

Sn ●

Bit

Description

STL and STLE should be used in pairs. STL represents the start of a flow, STLE represents the end of a flow.

After executing of SET Sxxx instruction, the flow specified by these instructions is ON. After executing RST Sxxx instruction, the specified flow is OFF. In flow S0, SET S1 close the current flow S0, open flow S1. In flow S0, ST S2 open the flow S2, but don’t close flow S0. When flow turns from ON to be OFF, reset OUT、PLS、PLF、not accumulate timer etc.

which belongs to the flow. ST instruction is usually used when a program needs to run more flows at the same time. After executing of SET Sxxx instruction, the pulse instructions will be closed (including

one-segment, multi-segment, relative or absolute, return to the origin)


SET S0

STL S0

SET S1

ST S2

STL S1

STLE

STLE

STL S2

STLE


4-3-4． [FOR] and [NEXT] 1.Summary Loop execute the program between FOR and NEXT with the specified times;

Loop starts [FOR] 16 bits FOR 32 bits - Execution

condition

Rising/Falling edge Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Loop ends [NEXT] 16 bits NEXTs 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2.Operands


S Program’s loop times between FOR~NEXT 16 bits, BIN 3.Suitable Soft Components

FOR.NEXT instructions must be programmed as a pair. Nesting is allowed, and the nesting

level is 8. Between FOR/NEXT, LDP.LDF instructions are effective for one time. Every time when M0

turns from OFF to ON, and M1 turns from OFF to ON, [A] loop is executed 6 times. Every time if M0 turns from OFF to ON and M3 is ON, [B] loop is executed 5×7=35 times. If there are many loop times, the scan cycle will be prolonged. Monitor timer error may

occur, please note this. If NEXT is before FOR, or no NEXT, or NEXT is behind FENG,END, or FOR and NEXT

number is not equal, an error will occur. Between FOR~NEXT, CJ nesting is not allowed, also in one STL, FOR~NEXT must be

programmed as a pair.

Operands System Constant Module


S ● ●

Word

Description


F O R K 6

IN C D 0

N E X T

F O R K 7

IN C D 1

N E X T

N E X T

F O R K 5M 0

M 3

M 1

[A ]

[B ]

[C ]

S ·

4-3-5． [FEND] and [END] 1.Summary FEND means the main program ends, while END means program ends;

main program ends [FEND] Execution condition - Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM Hardware requirement - Software requirement - program ends [END] Execution condition - Suitable Models XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM Hardware requirement - Software requirement -

2.Operands


None - - 3.Suitable Soft Components

Even though [FEND] instruction represents the end of the main program, if execute this instruction, the function is same with END. Execute the output/input disposal, monitor the refresh of the timer, return to the 0th step.

None

Description


If program the tag of CALL instruction behind FEND instruction, there must be SRET instruction. If the interrupt pointer program behind FEND instruction, there must be IRET instruction.

After executing CALL instruction and before executing SRET instruction, if execute FEND instruction; or execute FEND instruction after executing FOR instruction and before executing NEXT, then an error will occur.

In the condition of using many FEND instruction, please compile routine or subroutine between the last FEND instruction and END instruction.

4-4． Data compare function

Mnemonic Function Chapter LD＝ LD activates when（S1)＝（S2) 4-4-1 LD＞ LD activates when（S1)＞（S2) 4-4-1 LD＜ LD activates when（S1)＜（S2) 4-4-1 LD＜＞ LD activates when（S1)≠（S2) 4-4-1 LD＜＝ LD activates when（S1)≤（S2) 4-4-1 LD＞＝ LD activates when（S1)≥（S2) 4-4-1 AND＝ AND activates when（S1)＝（S2) 4-4-2 AND＞ AND activates when（S1)＞（S2) 4-4-2 AND＜ AND activates when（S1)＜（S2) 4-4-2 AND＜＞ AND activates when（S1)≠（S2) 4-4-2 AND＜＝ AND activates when（S1)≤（S2) 4-4-2 AND＞＝ AND activates when（S1)≥（S2) 4-4-2


OR＝ OR activates when（S1)＝（S2) 4-4-3 OR＞ OR activates when（S1)＞（S2) 4-4-3 OR＜ OR activates when（S1)＜（S2) 4-4-3 OR＜＞ OR activates when（S1)≠（S2) 4-4-3 OR＜＝ OR activates when（S1)≤（S2) 4-4-3 OR＞＝ OR activates when（S1)≥（S2) 4-4-3

4-4-1．LD Compare [LD□]

1. Summary

LD□ is the point compare instruction connected with the generatrix. LD Compare [LD□] 16 bits As below 32 bits As below Execution

condition

- Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2.Operands


S1 Specify the Data ( to be compared) or soft component’s address code

16/32bits, BIN

S2 Specify the comparand’s value or soft component’s address code

16/32 bits, BIN

3.Suitable soft components 16 bits instruction 32 bits instruction Activate Condition Not Activate Condition LD＝ DLD＝（S1)＝（S2) （S1)≠（S2) LD＞ DLD＞（S1)＞（S2) （S1)≤（S2)



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description


LD＜ DLD＜（S1)＜（S2) （S1)≥（S2) LD＜＞ DLD＜＞（S1)≠（S2) （S1)＝（S2) LD＜＝ DLD＜＝（S1)≤（S2) （S1)＞（S2) LD＞＝ DLD＞＝（S1)≥（S2) （S1)＜（S2)

LD＞ D200 K-30 SET Y1

DLD＞ K68899 C300 M50

X1

M4

S1· S2·

LD= K100 C0 Y0X0

4-4-2．AND Compare [AND□] 1.Summary

AND□: The compare instruction to serial connect with the other contactors. AND Compare [AND□] 16 bits As Below 32 bits As Below Execution

condition


Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2.Operands



16/32bit,BIN


16/32bit,BIN

3.suitable soft components

When the source data’s highest bit (16 bits：b15，32 bits：b31) is 1，use the data as a negative.

The comparison of 32 bits counter (C300~) must be 32 bits instruction. If assigned as a 16 bits instruction, it will lead the program error or operation error.

。

Note Items

Operands System Konstant Module


S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word


16 bits instruction 32 bits instruction Activate Condition Not Activate Condition AND＝ DAND＝（S1)＝（S2) （S1)≠（S2) AND＞ DAND＞（S1)＞（S2) （S1)≤（S2) AND＜ DAND＜（S1)＜（S2) （S1)≥（S2) AND＜＞ DAND＜＞（S1)≠（S2) （S1)＝（S2) AND＜＝ DAND＜＝（S1)≤（S2) （S1)＞（S2) AND＞＝ DAND＞＝（S1)≥（S2) （S1)＜（S2)

AND＝ K100 C0 Y0

AND＞ D0K-30 SET Y1

DAND＞ K68899 D10 M50

X1

M4

X0

X2

S1· S2·

4-4-3．Parallel Compare [OR□] 1. Summary

OR□ The compare instruction to parallel connect with the other contactors Parallel Compare [OR□] 16 bits As below 32 bits As below Execution - Suitable XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Description



Note Items


condition Models

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands



16/32 bit,BIN


16/32 bit,BIN

3. suitable soft components 16 bits instruction 32 bits instruction Activate Condition Not Activate Condition OR＝ DOR＝（S1)＝（S2) （S1)≠（S2) OR＞ DOR＞（S1)＞（S2) （S1)≤（S2) OR＜ DOR＜（S1)＜（S2) （S1)≥（S2) OR＜＞ DOR＜＞（S1)≠（S2) （S1)＝（S2) OR＜＝ DOR＜＝（S1)≤（S2) （S1)＞（S2) OR＞＝ DOR＞＝（S1)≥（S2) （S1)＜（S2)

OR＝ K100 C0

Y0

DOR＞ K68899D10

M50M4

X0

X2

S1· S2·



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description


4-5．Data Move

Mnemonic Function Chapter CMP Data compare 4-5-1 ZCP Data zone compare 4-5-2 MOV Move 4-5-3 BMOV Data block move 4-5-4 PMOV Data block move (with faster speed) 4-5-5 FMOV Fill move 4-5-6 FWRT FlashROM written 4-5-7 MSET Zone set 4-5-8 ZRST Zone reset 4-5-9 SWAP The high and low byte of the destinated

devices are exchanged 4-5-10

XCH Exchange 4-5-11



Note Items


4-5-1．Data Compare [CMP] 1. Summary

Compare the two specified Data, output the result. Data compare [CMP] 16 bits CMP 32 bits DCMP Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising/falling edge

Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 Specify the data (to be compared) or soft component’s address code

16 bit,BIN

S Specify the comparand’s value or soft component’s address code

16 bit,BIN

D Specify the compare result’s address code bit 3. Suitable soft component

CMP D10 D20 M0

S1·

X0

M0

M1

M2

D10 > D20

S·

D10 = D20

D10 < D20

ON

ON

ON

D

Word Operands System Constant Module


S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Oper

ands

System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

D ● ● ●

Bit

Description

Even X000=OFF to stop ZCP instruction, M0~M2 will

keep the original status Compare data and , output the three points’ ON/OFF status (start with ) according to the value

S1· S·

D·


4-5-2．Data zone compare [ZCP] 1. Summary

Compare the two specify Data with the current data, output the result. Data Zone compare [ZCP] 16 bits ZCP 32 bits DZCP Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 Specify the down-limit Data (of the compare stand) or soft component’s address code

16 bit, BIN

S2 Specify the Up-limit Data (of the compare stand) or soft component’s address code

16 bit, BIN

S Specify the current data or soft component’s address code

16 bit, BIN

D Specify the compare result’s data or soft component’s address code

bit

3.Suitable soft components

，＋1，＋2 ：the three point’s on/off output according to the valve D· D· D·



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit Oper

ands

System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

D ● ● ●


4-5-3．MOV [MOV]

ZCP D20 D30 D0 M0

S1· S2· S· D·

X0

M0

M1

M2

D0 M0 ON

M1 ON

M2 ON

D0

D0

D20

D20 D31（分）

D31（分）

＞

≤ ≤

＞

1. Summary

Move the specified data to the other soft components MOV [MOV] 16 bits MOV 32 bits DMOV Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Specify the source data or register’s address code 16 bit/32 bit, BIN D Specify the target soft component’s address code 16 bit/32 bit, BIN

3. Suitable soft component

Even X000=OFF stop ZCP instruction，M0~M2 will keep

the original status

Description

Compare data with and , output the three point’s ON/OFF status according to the zone size.

，＋1，＋2 : the three point’s ON/OFF output according to the result

S· D·

D·D·D·



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S1 S2


MOV K10 D10X0

S· D·

<read the counter’s or time’s current value> <indirectly specify the counter’s ,time’s set value>

MOV T0 D20X1

MOV K10 D20X2

M0T20 D20

< Move the 32bits data >

DMOV D0 D10

DMOV C235 D20

Description Move the source data to the target When X000 is off, the data keeps

same Convert constant K10 to be BIN

code automatically

（K10)（D10)

D20=K10 ( The current value of T0)→(D20)

The same as counter

Please use DMOV when the value is 32 bits, such as MUL instruction, high speed counter…

(D1，D0)→(D11，D10)

(the current value of C235)→(D21，D20)


4-5-4．Data block Move [BMOV] 1. Summary

Move the specified data block to Data block move [BMOV] 16 bits BMOV 32 bits - Execution

condition


Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Specify the source data block or soft component address code

16 bits, BIN; bit

D Specify the target soft components address code 16 bits, BIN; bit n Specify the move data’s number 16 bits, BIN;

3. Suitable soft components

Move the specified “n” data to the specified “n” soft components in the form block.

BMOV D5 D10 K3X0

nS· D·

D5

D6

D7

D10

D11

D12

n=3



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S ● ● ●

D ● ● ●

Description


As the following picture, when the data address overlapped, the instruction will do from 1 to 3.

BMOV D10 D11 K3

BMOV D10 D9 K3X1

X2

D10

D11

D12

D9

D10

D11

D10

D11

D12

D11

D12

D13

①

②

③

③

②

①


4-5-5．Data block Move [PMOV] 1. Summary

Move the specified data block to the other soft components Data block mov[PMOV] 16 bits PMOV 32 bits - Execution

condition


Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands



16 bits, BIN; bit



Move the specifed “n” data to the specified “n” soft components in form of block

PMOV D5 D10 K3X0

nS· D·

D5

D6

D7

D10

D11

D12

n=3



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Oper

ands

system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S ● ● ●

D ● ● ●

Bit

Description


4-5-6．Fill Move [FMOV] 1. Summary

Move the specified data block to the other soft components Fill Move [FMOV] 16 bits FMOV 32 bits DFMOV Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

DFMOV need above V3.0 Software

requirement

-

2. Operands



16 bits, BIN; bit




FMOV K0 D0 K10X0

nS· D·

The function of PMOV and BMOV is mostly the same, but the PMOV has the faster speed

PMOV finish in one scan cycle, when executing PMOV , close all the interruptions

Mistake many happen, if there is a repeat with source address and target address



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Description


Move K0 to D0~D9, copy a single data device to a range of destination

device The data stored in the source device (S) is copied to every device within

the destination range, The range is specified by a device head address (D) and a quantity of consecutive elements (n).

If the specified number of destination devices (n) exceeds the available space at the destination location, then only the available destination devices will be written to.

<32 bits instruction >

DFMOV D0 D10 K3X0

nS· D·

Move D0.D1 to D10.D11:D12.D13:D14.D15.

<16 bits Fill Move > <32 bits Fill move>

K0 D0K0

n

D1K0

D2K0

D3K0

D4K0

D5K0

D6K0

D7K0

D8K0

D9K0



4-5-7．FlashROM Write [FWRT] 1. Summary

Write the specified data to other soft components FlashROM Write [FWRT] 16 bits FWRT 32 bits DFWRT Execution

condition

rising/falling edge Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S The data write in the source or save in the soft element

16 bits/32 bits, BIN

D Write in target soft element 16 bits/32 bits, BIN D1 Write in target soft element start address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN D2 Write in data quantity bit


< Written of a word >

D0FWRT FD0X0

S· D·

<Written of double word> <Written of multi-word>

D0DFWRT FD0X1

S· D·

※1：FWRT instruction only allow to write data into FlashRom register. In this storage, even battery drop, data

could be used to store important technical parameters

※2：Written of FWRT needs a long time, about 150ms, so frequently operate this operate this operate operation is



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ●

D1 ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

Write value in D0 into FD0

D0FWRT FD0X2

K3

S· D1· D2·

Write value in D0,D1 into FD0,FD1 Write value in D0,D1,D2 into FD0,FD1,FD2


recommended

※3：The written time of Flshrom is about 1,000,000 times. So we suggest using edge signal (LDP, LDF etc.) to

trigger.

※4：Frequently written of FlashROM

4-5-8．Zone set [MSET]

1. Summary Set or reset the soft element in certain range

Multi-set [MSET] 16 bits MSET.ZRST 32 bits - Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


D1 Start soft element address bit D2 End soft element address bit


MSET M10 M120

D1· D2·X0

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Zone set unit M10~M120 Description

Are specified as the same type of soft units, and < When > ，will not run Zone set, set M8004.M8067，and

D8067=2。

D2·D1·D2·D1·

D2·D1·


4-5-9．Zone reset [ZRST] 1. Summary Reset the soft element in the certain range

Multi-reset [ZRST] 16 bits ZRST 32 bits - Execution

condition


Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


D1 Start address of soft element Bit:16 bits,BIN D2 End address of soft element Bit:16 bits,BIN


ZRST M500 M559

D0 D100

D1· D2·

D1· D2·

X0

ZRST



D1 ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Zone reset bits M5 00~M559。

Zone reset words D0~D100

Description

Are specified as the same type of soft units, and ＜ When > , only reset the soft unit specified in ，and set

M8004.M8067，D8067=2。

D2·D1·D2·D1·

D1·D2·D1·

Other Reset Instruction

As soft unit’s separate reset instruction, RST instruction can be used to bit unit Y, M, S and word unit T, C, D

As fill move for constant K0, 0 can be written into DX, DY, DM, DS, T, C, D.


4-5-10．Swap the high and low byte [SWAP] 1. Summary

Swap the high and low byte High and low byte swap [SWAP] 16 bits SWAP 32 bits - Execution

condition


Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S The address of the soft element 16 bits: BIN 3. Suitable soft components

SWAP D10

高8位

D10

低8位

S·X0



S ● ● ●

Description

Low 8 bits and high 8 bits change when it is 16 bits instruction. If the instruction is a consecutive executing instruction, each operation

cycle should change.


4-5-11．Exchange [XCH] 1. Summary

Exchange the data in two soft element Exchange [XCH] 16 bits XCH 32 bits DXCH Execution

condition


Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


D1 The soft element address 16 bits, BIN D2 The soft element address 16 bits, BIN

3. Suitable soft component <16 bits instruction>

XCH D10 D11X0

D1· D2·

<32 bits instruction >

DXCH D10 D20X0

D1· D2·



D1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

Before（D10）=100 →After （D10）=101

（D11）=101 （D11）=100

The contents of the two destination devices D1 and D2 are swapped, When drive input X0 is ON, each scan cycle should carry on data

exchange, please note.

32 bits instruction [DXCH] swaps value composed by D10、D11 and the value composed by D20、D21.


4-5-12．Floating move [EMOV]

1. Summary Send the floating number from one soft element to another

Floating move [EMOV] 16 bits - 32 bits EMOV Execution condition

Normally on/off, edge trigger Suitable models

XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM、XCC

Hardware V3.3 and higher Software V3.3 and higher

2. Operands Operand Function Type S Source soft element address 32 bits, BIN D Destination soft element address 32 bits, BIN

3. Suitable soft element


Binary floating → binary floating

（D1,D0）→（D11,D10）

X0 is ON, send the floating number from (D1, D0) to (D11, D10). X0 is OFF, the instruction doesn’t work

EMOV K500 D10X0

S· D·

（K500）→（D11,D10）

If constant value K, H is source soft element, they will be converted to floating number.

K500 will be converted to floating value.

Operand System Constant Module


S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Description


4-6．Data Operation Instructions

Mnemonic Function Chapter ADD Addition 4-6-1 SUB Subtraction 4-6-2 MUL Multiplication 4-6-3 DIV Division 4-6-4 INC Increment 4-6-5 DEC Decrement 4-6-5 MEAN Mean 4-6-6 WAND Logic Word And 4-6-7 WOR Logic Word Or 4-6-7 WXOR Logic Exclusive Or 4-6-7 CML Compliment 4-6-8 NEG Negation 4-6-9


4-6-1 Addition [ADD] 1. Summary

Add two numbers and store the result Add [ADD] 16 bits ADD 32 bits DADD Execution

condition


Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 The number address 16 bit/32 bit, BIN S2 The number address 16 bit/32bit, BIN D The result address 16 bit/32bit, BIN


ADD D10 D12 D14X0

S1· S2· D·



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

（D10）＋（D12）→（D14）

The data contained within the two source devices are combined and the total is stored in the specified destination device. Each data’s highest bit is the sign bit, 0 stands for positive、1 stands for negative. All calculations are algebraic processed.（5+（-8）=-3）

If the result of a calculation is “0”, the “0” flag acts. If the result exceeds 323，767（16 bits limit）or 2,147,483,647（32 bits limit）, the carry flag acts.（refer to the next page）. If the result exceeds –323,768（16 bits limit）or –2,147,483,648（32 bits limit）, the borrow flag acts（Refer to the next page。

When carry on 32 bits operation, word device’s low 16 bits are assigned, the device following closely the preceding device’s ID will be the high bits. To avoid ID repetition, we recommend you assign device’s ID to be even ID.

The same device may be used as a source and a destination. If this is the case then the result changes after every scan cycle. Please note this point.


Flag meaning

Flag Name Function

M8020 Zero ON：the calculate result is zero OFF：the calculate result is not zero

M8021 Borrow ON：the calculate result is less than -32768(16 bit) or -2147483648(32bit) OFF：the calculate result is over -32768(16 bit) or -2147483648(32bit)

M8022 Carry ON：the calculate result is over 32768(16 bit) or 2147483648(32bit) OFF：the calculate result is less than 32768(16 bit) or 2147483648(32bit)

4-6-2．Subtraction [SUB] 1. Summary

Sub two numbers, store the result Subtraction [SUB] 16 bits SUB 32 bits DSUB Execution

condition


Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2.Operands


S1 The number address 16 bits /32 bits,BIN S2 The number address 16 bits /32 bits,BIN D The result address 16 bits /32 bits,BIN

3.Suitable soft component

Related flag



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word


SUB D10 D12 D14

X0S1· S2· D·

The relationship of the flag’s action and vale’s positive/negative is shown below:

4-6-3．Multiplication [MUL]

1. Summary

Multiply two numbers, store the result Multiplication [MUL] 16 bits MUL 32 bits DMUL Execution

condition


Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 The number address 16 bits/32bits,BIN S2 The number address 16 bits/32bits,BIN D The result address 16 bits/32bits,BIN


（D10）—（D12）→（D14） Description

appoint the soft unit’s content, subtract the soft unit’s content appointed by in the format of algebra. The result will be stored in the soft unit appointed by . (5-(-8)=13)

The action of each flag, the appointment method of 32 bits operation’s soft units are both the same with the preceding ADD instruction.

The importance is: in the preceding program, if X0 is ON, SUB operation will be executed every scan cycle

S1· S2·

D·


<16 bits Operation>

MUL D0 D2 D4X0

S1· S2· D·

<32 bits Operation >

X1DMUL D0 D2 D4

S1· S2· D·

4-6-4．Division [DIV] 1. Summary

Divide two numbers and store the result Division [DIV] 16 bits DIV 32 bits DDIV Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 The number address 16 bits / 32 bits, BIN S2 The number address 16 bits /32 bits, BIN



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description BIN BIN BIN

（D0） × (D2) → （D5，D4）

16 bits 16 bits → 32 bits

The contents of the two source devices are multiplied together and the result is stored at the destination device in the format of 32 bits. As in the upward chart: when (D0)=8、(D2)=9, (D5, D4) =72.

The result’s highest bit is the symbol bit: positive (0)、negative (1). When be bit unit, it can carry on the bit appointment of K1~K8. When appoint K4, only

the result’s low 16 bits can be obtained.

BIN BIN BIN

（D1，D0）× （D3，D2） → （D7，D6，D5，D4）

32 bits 32 bits → 64 bits

When use 2 bits Operation ,the result is stored at the destination device in the format of 64 bits.

Even use word device, 64 bits results can’t be monitored at once.


D The result address 16 bits /32 bits, BIN 3.Suitable soft components

<16 bits operation >

DIV D0 D2 D4X0

S1· S2· D·

<32 bits operation >

DDIV D0 D2 D4X1

S1· S2· D·



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Dividend Divisor Result Remainder

BIN BIN BIN BIN

(D0) ÷ (D2) → D4） ┅ (D5)

16 bits 16 bits 16 bits 16 bits

Description

appoints the device’s content be the dividend, appoints the device’s content be the divisor, appoints the device and the next one to store the result and the remainder.

In the above example, if input X0 is ON, devision operation is executed every scan cycle.

D·

S2·S1·

Dividend Divisor Result Remainder

BIN BIN BIN BIN

(D1,D0) ÷ (D3,D2) （D5,D4）┅ (D7,D6)

32 bits 32 bits 32 bits 32 bits

The dividend is composed by the device appointed by and the next one. The divisor is composed by the device appointed by and the next one. The result and the remainder are stored in the four sequential devices, the first one is appointed by

If the value of the divisor is 0, then an operation error is executed and the operation of the DIV instruction is cancelled

S1·

S2·

D·

The highest bit of the result and remainder is the symbol bit (positive:0, negative: 1). When any of the dividend or the divisor is negative, then the result will be negative. When the dividend is negative, then the remainder will be negative.


4-6-5．Increment [INC] & Decrement [DEC] 1. Summary

Increase or decrease the number Increment 1[INC] 16 bits INC 32 bits DINC Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Increment 1[DEC] 16 bits DEC 32 bits DDEC Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


D The number address 16 bits / 32bits,BIN 3. Suitable soft components

< Increment [INC]>

INC D0X0

D·

<Decrement [DEC]>



D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Description

（D0）＋1→(D0)

On every execution of the instruction the device specified as the destination has its current value incremented (increased) by a value of 1.

In 16 bits operation, when +32,767 is reached, the next increment will write -32,767 to the destination device. In this case, there’s no additional flag to identify this change in the counted value.

D·


DEC D0X1

D·

4-6-6．Mean [MEAN] 1. Summary

Get the mean value of numbers Mean [MEAN] 16 bits MEAN 32 bits DMEAN Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S The head address of the numbers 16 bits, BIN D The mean result address 16 bits, BIN n The number quantity 16 bits, BIN


(D0) + +

3(D10)

(D1) (D2)

（D0）－1 →（D0）

On every execution of the instruction the device specified as the destination has its current value decremented (decreased) by a value of 1.

When -32，768 or -2，147，483，648 is reached, the next decrement will write +32，767 or +2，147，483，647 to the destination device.

D·



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Description MEAN D0 D10 K3

S· D·X0

n


4-6-7．Logic AND [WAND] , Logic OR[WOR], Logic Exclusive OR [WXOR] 1. Summary

Do logic AND, OR, XOR for numbers Logic AND [WAND] 16 bits WAND 32 bits DWAND Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Logic OR[WOR] 16 bits WOR 32 bits DWOR Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Logic Exclusive OR [WXOR] 16 bits WXOR 32 bits DWXOR Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 The soft element address 16bit/32bit,BIN S2 The soft element address 16bit/32bit,BIN D The result address 16bit/32bit,BIN

The value of all the devices within the source range is summed and then divided by the number of devices summed, i.e. n.. This generates an integer mean value which is stored in the destination device (D) The remainder of the calculated mean is ignored.

If the value of n is specified outside the stated range (1 to 64) an error is generated.



< Execute logic AND operation with each bit>

WAND D10 D12 D14

D·X0

S1· S2·

< Execute logic OR operation with each bit >

WOR D10 D12 D14

D·X0

S1· S2·

< Execute logic Exclusive OR operation with each bit >

WXOR D10 D12 D14

D·X0

S1· S2·

If use this instruction along with CML instruction, XOR NOT operation could also be executed.

WXOR D10 D12 D14

D·X0

S1· S2·

CML D14 D14



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description 0&0=0 0&1=0 1&0=0 1&1=1

0 or 0=0 0 or 1=1 1 or 0=1 1 or 1=1

0 xor 0=0 0 xor 1=1 1 xor 0=1 1 xor 1=0


4-6-8．Converse [CML] 1. Summary

Converse the phase of the numbers Converse [CML] 16 bits CML 32 bits DCML Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Source number address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN D Result address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN


CML D0 DY0

S· D·M0↑

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0

D0

Y17 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4

Sign bit

（0=positive，1=negative）

< Reading of inverted input >



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Each data bit in the source device is inverted （1→0，0→1） and sent to the destination device. If use constant K in the source device, it can be auto convert to be binary.

It’s available when you want to inverted output the PLC’s output

Description


M0

M1

M2

M3

M17

CML DX0 DM0M8000

X0

X1

X2

X3

X17

4-6-9．Negative [NEG]

1. Summary

Get the negative number Negative [NEG] 16 bits NEG 32 bits DNEG Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC1.XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


D The source number address 16 bits/ bits, BIN 3. Suitable soft components

NEG D10 (D10) +1 (D10)M0

D·

The sequential control instruction in the left could be denoted by the following CML instruction.



D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

The bit format of the selected device is inverted, I.e. any occurrence of a “1’ becomes a “0” and any occurrence of “0” becomes “1”, when this is complete, a further binary 1 is added to the bit format. The result is the total logic sigh change of the selected devices contents.


4-7．Shift Instructions

Mnemonic Function Chapter SHL Arithmetic shift left 4-7-1 SHR Arithmetic shift right 4-7-1 LSL Logic shift left 4-7-2 LSR Logic shift right 4-7-2 ROL Rotation left 4-7-3 ROR Rotation right 4-7-3 SFTL Bit shift left 4-7-4 SFTR Bit shift right 4-7-5 WSFL Word shift left 4-7-6 WSFR Word shift right 4-7-7


4-7-1．Arithmetic shift left [SHL], Arithmetic shift right [SHR] 1. Summary

Do arithmetic shift left/right for the numbers Arithmetic shift left [SHL] 16 bits SHL 32 bits DSHL Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Arithmetic shift right [SHR] 16 bits SHR 32 bits DSHR Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


D The source data address 16bit/32bit,BIN n Shift left or right times 16bit/32bit,BIN


< Arithmetic shift left > < Arithmetic shift right >



D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

After once execution, the low bit is filled in 0, the final bit is stored in carry flag.

After once execution, the high bit is same with the bit before shifting, the final bit is stored in carry flag.

Description


、

4-7-2．Logic shift left [LSL] , Logic shift right [LSR] 1. Summary

Do logic shift right/left for the numbers Logic shift left [LSL] 16 bits LSL 32 bits DLSL Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Logic shift right [LSR] 16 bits LSR 32 bits DLSR Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


D Source data address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN n Arithmetic shift left/right times 16 bits/32bits, BIN




D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word


LSR and SHR is different, LSR add 0 in high bit when moving, SHR all bits are moved.

< Logic shift left > < Logic shift right >

4-7-3．Rotation shift left [ROL] , Rotation shift right [ROR] 1. Summary

Continue and cycle shift left or right Rotation shift left [ROL] 16 bits ROL 32 bits DROL Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

Rotation shift right [ROR] 16 bits ROR 32 bits DROR Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands Operands Function Data Type

After once execution, the low bit is filled in 0, the final bit is stored in carry flag.

LSL meaning and operation are the same as SHL. After once execution, the high bit is same with the bit before shifting,

the final bit is stored in carry flag。

Description


D Source data address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN n Shift right or left times 16 bits/32 bits, BIN


< Rotation shift left > < Rotation shift right >

4-7-4．Bit shift left [SFTL]

1. Summary

Bit shift left Bit shift left [SFTL] 16 bits SFTL 32 bits DSFTL Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands

Operands Function Types S Source soft element head address bit D Target soft element head address bit



D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

The bit format of the destination device is rotated n bit places to the left on every operation of the instruction.

Description


n1 Source data quantity 16 bits /32 bits, BIN n2 Shift left times 16 bits/32 bits, BIN


4-7-5．Bit shift right [SFTR] 1. Summary

Bit shift right Bit shift right [SFTR] 16 bits SFTR 32 bits DSFTR Execution rising/falling edge Suitable XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM



n1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

S ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

The instruction copies n2 source devices to a bit stack of length n1. For every new addition of n2 bits, the existing data within the bit stack is shifted n2 bits to the left/right. Any bit data moving to the position exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area.

In every scan cycle, loop shift left action will be executed

Description

① M15~M12→Overflow

② M11~M 8→M15~M 12

③ M 7~M 4→M11~M8

④ M 3~M 0→M7~M4

⑤ X 3~X 0→M3~M0


condition Models

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Source soft element head address bit D Target soft element head address bit n1 Source data quantity 16 bits/32 bits, BIN n2 Shift right times 16 bits/32 bits, BIN




n1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit

The instruction copies n2 source devices to a bit stack of length n1. For every new addition of n2 bits, the existing data within the bit stack is shifted n2 bits to the left/right. Any bit data moving to the position exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area.

In every scan cycle, loop shift right action will be executed

Description

① M 3~M 0→Overflow

② M 7~M 4→M3~M0

③ M11~M 8→M7~M4

④ M15~M12→M11~M8

⑤ X 3~X 0→M15~M12

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

S ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ●


n2 word shift left

4-7-6．Word shift left [WSFL]

1. Summary

Word shift left Word shift left [ [WSFL] 16 bits WSFL 32 bits - Execution

condition


Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Source soft element head address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN D Target soft element head address 16 bits /32 bits, BIN n1 Source data quantity 16 bits /32 bits, BIN n2 Word shift left times 16 bits /32 bits, BIN




S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description The instruction copies n2 source devices to a word stack of length n1. For each addition of n2 words, the existing data within the word stack is shifted n2 words to the left. Any word data moving to a position exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area.

In every scan cycle, loop shift left action will be executed.

① D25~D22→Overflow

② D21~D18→D25~D22

③ D17~D14→D21~D18

④ D13~D10→D17~D14

⑤ D 3~D 0→D13~D10


4-7-7．Word shift right[WSFR] 1. Summary

Word shift right Word shift right [WSFR] 16 bits WSFR 32 bits - Execution

condition


Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Source soft element head address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN D Target soft element head address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN n1 Source data quantity 16 bits/32 bits, BIN n2 Shift right times 16 bits/32 bits, BIN




S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description The instruction copies n2 source devices to a word stack of length n1.

For each addition of n2 words, the existing data within the word stack is shifted n2 words to the right. Any word data moving to a position exceeding the n1 limit is diverted to an overflow area.


n2 字右移

4-8．Data Convert

Mnemonic Function Chapter WTD Single word integer converts to

double word integer 4-8-1

FLT 16 bits integer converts to float point

4-8-2

DFLT 32 bits integer converts to float point

4-8-2

FLTD 64 bits integer converts to float point

4-8-2

INT Float point converts to integer 4-8-3 BIN BCD convert to binary 4-8-4 BCD Binary converts to BCD 4-8-5 ASCI Hex. converts to ASCII 4-8-6 HEX ASCII converts to Hex. 4-8-7 DECO Coding 4-8-8 ENCO High bit coding 4-8-9 ENCOL Low bit coding 4-8-10

① D13~D10→Overflow

② D17~D14→D13~D10

③ D21~D18→D17~D14

④ D25~D22→D21~D18

⑤ D 3~D 0→D25~D22

In every scan cycle, loop shift right action will be executed


4-8-1．Single word integer converts to double word integer [WTD] 1. Summary

Single word integer converts to double word integer [WTD] 16 bits WTD 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Source soft element address 16 bits, BIN D Target soft element address 32 bits, BIN


WTD D0 D10X0

S· D·

High bits Low bits

D11 D10

0 or 1 D0



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description （D0） → （D11，D10） Single Word Double

When single word D0 is positive integer, after executing this instruction, the high bit of double word D10 is 0.

When single word D0 is negative integer, after executing this instruction, the high bit of double word D10 is 1.


4-8-2．16 bits integer converts to float point [FLT] 1. Summary

16 bits integer converts to float point [FLT] 16 bits FLT 32 bits DFLT 64 bits FLTD Execution

condition


Suitable

Models XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement -

2. Operands


S Source soft element address 16 bits/32 bits/64 bits,BIN D Target soft element address 32 bits/64 bits,BIN

3. Suitable soft components <16 bits>

<32 bits >

DFLT D10 D12

S· D·X0

<64 bits>

FLTD D10 D14

S· D·X0



S ● ● ●

D ●

Word

Description （D10） → (D13,D12)

BIN integer Binary float point FLT D10 D12

S· D·X0

（D11,D10）→ （D13,D12）

BIN integer Binary float point

（D13,D12,D11,D10）→ （D17,D16,D15,D14）

BIN integer Binary float point

Convert BIN integer to binary float point. As the constant K ,H will auto convert by the float operation instruction, so this FLT instruction can’t be used.

The instruction is contrary to INT instruction


4-8-3．Float point converts to integer [INT] 1. Summary

Float point converts to integer [INT] 16 bits INT 32 bits DINT Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Source soft element address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN D Target soft element address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN

3. Suitable soft components <16 bits>

INT D10 D20

S· D·X0

<32 bits>

DINT D10 D20

S· D·X0



S ● ●

D ●

Word

Description （D11,D10） → (D20)

Binary Float BIN integer

Give up the data after the decimal dot

（D11,D10） → (D20,D21)

Binary Float BIN integer

Give up the data after the decimal dot

The binary source number is converted into a BIN integer and stored at the destination device. Abandon the value behind the decimal point.

This instruction is contrary to FLT instruction. When the result is 0, the flag bit is ON

When converting, less than 1 and abandon it, zero flag is ON. The result is over below data, the carry flag is ON. 16 bits operation: -32,768~32,767 32 bits operation: -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647


4-8-4．BCD convert to binary [BIN] 1. Summary

BCD convert to binary [BIN] 16 bits BIN 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Source soft element address BCD D Target soft element address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN


BIN D10 D0

S· D·X0



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description Convert and move instruction of Source (BCD) → destination (BIN)

When source data is not BCD code, M8067（Operation error）, M8004 (error occurs) As constant K automatically converts to binary, so it’s not suitable for this instruction.


4-8-5．Binary convert to BCD [BCD] 1. Summary

Binary convert to BCD [BCD] 16 bits BCD 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Source soft element address 16 bits/32 bits, BIN D Target soft element address BCD code


BCD D10 D0

S· D·X0



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description Convert and move instruction of source (BIN)→destination (BCD)

This instruction can be used to output data directly to a seven-segment display.


4-8-6．Hex. converts to ASCII [ASCI] 1. Summary

Hex. convert to ASCII [ASCI] 16 bits ASCI 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Source soft element address 2 bits, HEX D Target soft element address ASCII code n Transform character quantity 16 bits, BIN


ASCI D100 D200 K4

S· D· nX0

The convert result is this

n D

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9

D200 down [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1] [8] D200 up [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] [1] D201 down [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] [2] D201 up [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] [3] D202 down [C] [B] [A] [0] [4] D202 up [C] [B] [A] [0] D203 down [C] [B] [A]



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

D·S· Convert each bit of source’s (S) Hex. format data to be ASCII code, move separately to the high 8 bits and low 8 bits of destination (D). The convert alphanumeric number is assigned with n.

is low 8 bits, high 8 bits, store ASCII data. D·


4-8-7．ASCII convert to Hex.[HEX]

1. Summary

ASCII converts to Hex. [HEX] 16 bits HEX 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands

Operands

Function Date type

S Source soft element address ASCII D Target soft element address 2 bits, HEX n Character quantity 16 bits, BIN


HEX D200 D100 K4

S· D· nX0

D203 up [C] [B] D204 down [C]

Assign start device： (D100)=0ABCH (D101)=1234H (D102)=5678H

[0]=30H [1]=31H [5]=35H [A]=41H [2]=32H [6]=36H [B]=42H [3]=33H [7]=37H [C]=43H [4]=34H [8]=38H



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Description

Convert the high and low 8 bits in source to HEX data. Move 4 bits every time to destination . The convert alphanumeric number is assigned by n.

S·

D·


The convert of the upward program is the following：时

n=k4 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0D200

41H? [A] 30H? [0]

0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0D201

43H? [C] 42H? [B]

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0D100

0 A B C

4-8-8．Coding [DECO] 1. Summary Transform the ASCII code to Hex numbers.

Coding [DECO] 16 bits DECO s - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Source soft element address ASCII D Target soft element address 2 bits HEX n The coding soft element quantity 16bits, BIN


(S·)

ASCII Code

HEX Convert

D200 down 30H 0 D200 up 41H A D201 down 42H B D201 up 43H C D202 down 31H 1 D202 up 32H 2 D203 down 33H 3 D203 up 34H 4 D204 down 35H 5

n (D·) D102 D101 D100

1 Not change to

be 0

···0H 2 ··0AH 3 ·0ABH 4 0ABCH 5 ···0H ABC1H 6 ··0AH BC12H 7 ·0ABH C123H 8 0ABCH 1234H 9 ···0H ABC1H 2345H


③

② ①

全部转化为 0 ③

① ②

< When is bit unit > n≤16

DX0DECO M10 K3X10

nS· D·

0 1 1

0 0 0 1 0 0 0

X002 X001 X000

M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10

7 6 5 4 2 1 0

4

0

< When is word device > n≤4

D0DECO D1 K3X0

nS· D·



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Description D·

The source address is 1+2=3，so starts from M10, the number 3 bit (M13) is 1. If the source are all 0, M10 is 1.

When n=0, no operation, beyond n=0~16, don’t execute the instruction. When n=16, if coding command is soft unit, it’s point is

2^16=65536。 When drive input is OFF, instructions are not executed, the activate

coding output keep on activate.

D·

Low n bits(n≤4) of source address is decoded to target address. n≤3, the high bit of target address all become 0.

When n=0, no operation, beyond n=0~14, don’t execute the instruction.


All be 0

② ①

③

4-8-9．High bit coding [ENCO]

1. Summary

Transform the ASCII code to hex numbers High bit coding [ENCO] 16 bits ENCO 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S data address need coding 16 bits, BIN; bit D Coding result address 16 bits, BIN n soft element quantity to save result 16 bits, BIN

3. Suitable soft components < When is bit device > n≤16

M10ENCO D10 K3X0

nS· D·

0 0 0 1 0 1 0M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10

7 6 5 4 2 1 00

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1D10b15

b0

4



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

S ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Description S·


被忽视

All be 0

① ②

③

< When is word device > n≤4

D0ENCO D1 K3X1

nS· D·

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

7 6 5 4 2 1 0

D0

D1b15

b15 b0

b0

4

If many bits in the source ID are 1, ignore the low bits. If source ID are all 0, don’t execute

the instructions. When drive input is OFF, the instruction is not executed, encode output don’t change. When n=8, if encode instruction’s “S” is bit unit, it’s point number is 2^8=256

4-8-10．Low bit coding [ENCOL] 1. Summary

Transform the ASCII to hex numbers. Low bit coding [ENCOL] 16 bits ENCOL 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Soft element address need coding 16bit,BIN；bit D Soft element address to save coding result 16bit,BIN n The soft element quantity to save result 16bit,BIN


S·


All be 0

② ①

③

被忽视

All be 0

① ②

③

<if is bit device > n≤16

M10ENCOL D10 K3X0

nS· D·

0 1 0 1 0 0 0M17 M16 M15 M14 M13 M12 M11 M10

7 6 5 4 2 1 00

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1D10b15

b0

4

< if is word device> n≤4

D0ENCOL D1 K3X1

nS· D·

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

7 6 5 4 2 1 0

D0

D1b15

b15 b0

b0

4



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Description S·

S·

If many bits in the source ID are 1, ignore the high bits. If source ID are all 0, don’t execute the instructions。

When drive input is OFF, the instruction is not executed, encode output don’t change

When n=8, if encode instruction’s is bit unit, it’s point number is 2^8=256 S·


4-9．Floating Operation

Mnemonic Function Chapter ECMP Float Compare 4-9-1 EZCP Float Zone Compare 4-9-2 EADD Float Add 4-9-3 ESUB Float Subtract 4-9-4 EMUL Float Multiplication 4-9-5 EDIV Float Division 4-9-6 ESQR Float Square Root 4-9-7 SIN Sine 4-9-8 COS Cosine 4-9-9 TAN Tangent 4-9-10 ASIN ASIN 4-9-11 ACOS ACOS 4-9-12 ATAN ATAN 4-9-13


4-9-1．Float Compare [ECMP] 1. Summary

Float Compare [ECMP] 16 bits - 32 bits ECMP Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 Soft element address need compare 32 bits, BIN S2 Soft element address need compare 32 bits, BIN D Compare result bit


ECMP D10 D20 M0

M0

M1

M2

X0D·S1· S2·



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ● ● ●

Bit

（D11,D10）：（D21,D20）→ M0,M1,M2 Binary Floating Binary Floating

Description

(D11,D10) > (D21<D20)

Binary Floating Binary Floating

(D11,D10) = (D21<D20)


(D11,D10) < (D21<D20)


The status of the destination device will be kept even if the ECMP instruction is

deactivated.


ECMP K500 D100 M10X0

4-9-2．Float Zone Compare [EZCP] 1. Summary

Float Zone Compare [EZCP] 16 bits - 32 bits EZCP Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 Soft element address need compare 32 bits, BIN S2 Upper limit of compare data 32 bits, BIN S3 Lower limit of compare data 32 bits, BIN D The compare result soft element address bit


The binary float data of S1 is compared to S2. The result is indicated by 3 bit devices specified with the head address entered as D

If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to floating point before the addition operation.

（K500）∶ （D101，D100）→M10,M11,M12

Binary converts Binary floating

to floating



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn..m

D ● ● ●

Bit


Compare a float range with a float value..

EZCP D10 D20 D0

M3

M4

M5

X0S1· S2·

M3

S3· D·

EZCP K10 K2800 D5 M0X0

Description

(D1,D0) < (D11,D10) ON


(D11,D10) ≤ (D1,D0 ) ≤（D21，D20） ON

Binary Floating Binary Floating Binary Floating

(D1,D0) > (D21,D20) ON


The status of the destination device will be kept even if the EZCP instruction

is deactivated.

The data of S1 is compared to the data of S2. The result is indicated by 3 bit devices specified with the head address entered as D.


（K10）∶ [D6,D5]∶ （K2800）→ M0，M1，M2

Binary converts Binary Floating Binary converts

to Floating to Floating

Please set S1<S2, when S2>S1, see S2 as the same with S1 and compare them


4-9-3．Float Add[EADD] 1. Summary

Float Add [EADD] 16 bits - 32 bits EADD Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 Soft element address need to add 32 bits, BIN S2 Soft element address need to add 32 bits, BIN D Result address 32 bits, BIN


EADD D10 D20 D50

S1· S2· D·X0

EADD D100 K1234 D110X1



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

（D11,D10） + (D21,D20) → (D51,D50)


The floating point values stored in the source devices S1 and S2 are algebraically added and the result stored in the destination device D.


（K1234） + ( D101,D100) → (D111,D110)

Binary converts to Floating Binary Floating Binary Floating

The same device may be used as a source and as the destination. If this is the case then, on continuous operation of the EADD instruction, the result of the previous operation will be used as a new source value and a new result calculated. This will happen every program scan unless the pulse modifier or an interlock program is used.


4-9-4．Float Sub[ESUB] 1. Summary

Float Sub [ESUB] 16 bits - 32 bits ESUB Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 Soft element address need to subtract 32 bits, BIN S2 Soft element address need to subtract 32 bits, BIN D Result address 32 bits, BIN


ESUB D10 D20 D50

S1· S2· D·X0

ESUB D100K1234 D110X1



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

(D11,D10) － (D21,D20) → (D51,D50)


The floating point value of S2 is subtracted from the floating point value of S1 and the result stored in destination device D.

If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to floating point before the addition operation。

（K1234）－ (D101,D100) → (D111,D110)


The same device may be used as a source and as the destination. If this is the case then, on continuous operation of the EADD instruction, the result of the previous operation will be used as a new source value and a new result calculated. This will happen every program scan unless the pulse modifier or an interlock program is used.


4-9-5．Float Mul[EMUL] 1. Summary

Float Multiply [EMUL] 16 bits - 32 bits EMUL Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 Soft element address need to multiply 32 bits, BIN S2 Soft element address need to multiply 32 bits, BIN D Result address 32 bits, BIN


EMUL D10 D20 D50

S1· S2· D·X0

EMUL D100K100 D110X1



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

（D11，D10） × （D21,D20）→ （D51,D50）


The floating value of S1 is multiplied with the floating value point value of S2. The result of the multiplication is stored at D as a floating value


（K100） × （D101,D100） → （D111,D110）



4-9-6．Float Div[EDIV] 1. Summary

Float Divide [EDIV] 16 bits - 32 bits EDIV Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S1 Soft element address need to divide 32 bits, BIN S2 Soft element address need to divide 32 bits, BIN D Result address 32 bits, BIN


EDIV D10 D20 D50

S1· S2· D·X0

EDIV D100 K100 D110X1



S1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

word

Description

（D11,D10） ÷ （D21,D20）→ （D51,D50）


The floating point value of S1 is divided by the floating point value of S2. The result of the division is stored in D as a floating point value. No remainder is calculated.

If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to floating point before the addition operation

（D101,D100） ÷ （K100） →（D111,D110）


If S2 is 0, the calculate is error, the instruction can not work


4-9-7．Float Square Root [ESQR] 1. Summary

Float Square Root [ESQR] 16 bits - 32 bits ESQR Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S The soft element address need to do square root 32 bits, BIN D The result address 32 bits, BIN


ESQR D10 D20X0

S· D·

ESQR K1024 D110X1



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

（D11,D10） →（D21,D20）

Binary Floating Binary Floating Description

A square root is performed on the floating point value in S the result is stored in D If a constant K or H used as source data, the value is converted to floating point before

the addition operation.

（K1024） → （D111，D110）

Binary converts to Floating Binary Floating

When the result is zero, zero flag activates. Only when the source data is positive will the operation be effective. If S is negative

then an error occurs and error flag M8067 is set ON, the instruction can’t be executed.


4-9-8．Sine[SIN] 1. Summary

Float Sine[SIN] 16 bits - 32 bits SIN Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S The soft element address need to do sine 32 bits, BIN D The result address 32 bits, BIN


SIN D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

S·

D·



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

(D51,D50) → (D61,D60)SIN


This instruction performs the mathematical SIN operation on the floating point value in S (angle RAD). The result is stored in D.

RAD value (angle×π/180)

Assign the binary floating value

SIN value

Binary Floating


4-9-9．Cosine[SIN] 1. Summary

Float Cosine[COS] 16 bits - 32 bits COS Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Soft element address need to do cos 32 bits, BIN D Result address 32 bits, BIN


COS D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

S·

D·



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

(D51,D50)RAD → (D61,D60)COS


This instruction performs the mathematical COS operation on the floating point value in S (angle RAD). The result is stored in D。



COS value

Binary Floating


4-9-10．TAN [TAN] 1. Summary

TAN [TAN] 16 bits - 32 bits TAN Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

- Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Soft element address need to do tan 32bit,BIN D Result address 32bit,BIN


TAN D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

S·

D·



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Description

(D51,D50)RAD → (D61,D60)TAN


This instruction performs the mathematical TAN operation on the floating point value in S. The result is stored in D.



TAN value

Binary Floating


4-9-11．ASIN [ASIN] 1. Summary

ASIN [ASIN] 16 bits - 32 bits ASIN Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

V3.0 and above version Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Soft element address need to do arcsin 32 bits, BIN D Result address 32 bits, BIN


ASIN D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

S·

D·



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

(D51,D50)ASIN → (D61,D60)RAD


This instruction performs the mathematical ASIN operation on the floating point value in S. The result is stored in D.

ASIN value

Binary Floating




4-9-12．ACOS [ACOS] 1. Summary

ACOS [ACOS] 16 bits - 32 bits ACOS Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement

V3.0 and above Software

requirement

-

2. Operands


S Soft element address need to do arccos 32 bits, BIN D Result address 32 bits, BIN


ACOS D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

S·

D·



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

(D51,D50)ACOS → (D61,D60)RAD


Calculate the arcos value(radian), save the result in the target address

TCOS value

Binary Floating




4-9-13．ATAN [ATAN] 1. Summary

ATAN [ATAN] 16 bits - 32 bits ACOS Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement


requirement

-

2. Operands


S Soft element address need to do arctan 32 bit, BIN D Result address 32 bit, BIN


ATAN D50 D60X0

S· D·

D51 D50

D61 D60

S·

D·



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ● ●

Word

Description

(D51,D50)ATAN → (D61,D60)RAD


Calculate the arctan value ( radian), save the result in the target address

ATAN value

Binary Floating




4-10．RTC Instructions

Mnemonic Function Chapter TRD Clock data read 4-10-1 TWR Clock data write 4-10-2

※1: To use the instructions, The Model should be equipped with RTC function;


4-10-1．Read the clock data [TRD] 1. Instruction Summary

Read the clock data: Read the clock data: [TRD] 16 bits TRD 32 bits - Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement


requirement

-

2. Operands


D Register to save clock data 16 bits, BIN 3. Suitable Soft Components

TRD D0X0

D·

Read PLC’s real time clock according to the following format.

The reading source is the special data register (D8013~D8019) which save clock data.



D ● ● ●

Functions And Actions

The current time and date of the real time clock are read and stored in the 7 data devices specified by the head address D.

Unit Item

D0 Year

D1 Month

D2 Date

D3 Hour

D4 Minute

D5 Second

D Week

Unit Item Clock data

Special data register for real tim

e clock t

D8018 Year 0-99

D8017 Month 1-12

D8016 Date 1-31

D8015 Hour 0-23

D8014 Minute 0-59

D8013 Second 0-59

D8019 Week 0 (Sun.)-6 (Sat.)


4-10-2．Write Clock Data [TWR] 1. Instruction Summary

Write the clock data: Write clock data [TRD] 16 bits - 32 bits TRD Execution

condition


Suitable

Models

XC2.XC3.XC5.XCM

Hardware

requirement


requirement

-

2. Operands


S Write the clock data to the register 16 bits, BIN 3. Suitable Soft Components

TWR D0X0

S·



S ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

The 7 data devices specified with the head

address S are used to set a new current value of

the real time clock.


Write the set clock data into PLC’s real time clock. In order to write real time clock, the 7 data devices specified with the head address should be pre-set.

S·

Unit Item Clock data

Data for clock setting

D10 Year 0-99

D11 Month 1-12

D12 Date 1-31

D13 Hour 0-23

D14 Minute 0-59

D15 Second 0-59

D16 Week 0 (Sun.)-6 (Sat.)

Unit Item

D8018 Year Special data register for real tim

e clock t

D8017 Month

D8016 Date

D8015 Hour

D8014 Minute

D8013 Second

D8019 Week


After executing TWR instruction, the time in real time clock will immediately change to be the new set time. So, when setting the time it is a good idea to set the source data to a time a number of minutes ahead and then drive the instruction when the real time reaches this value.


5 HIGH SPEED COUNTER (HSC)

In this chapter we tell high speed counter’s functions, including high speed count

model, wiring method, read/write HSC value, reset etc.

5-1．FUNCTIONS SUMMARY

5-2．HIGH SPEED COUNTER’S MODE

5-3．HIGH SPEED COUNTER’S RANGE

5-4．INPUT WIRING OF HIGH SPEED COUNTER

5-5．INPUT TERMINALS ASSIGNMENT FOR HSC

5-6．READ AND WRITE THE HSC VALUE

5-7．RESET MODE OF HSC

5-8．FREQUENCY MULTIPLICATION OF AB PHASE HSC

5-9．HSC EXAMPLES

5-10．HSC INTERRUPTION

Instructions List for HSC

MNEMONIC FUNCTION CIRCUIT AND SOFT COMPONENTS CHAPTER

READ/WRITE HIGH SPEED COUNTER

HSCR Read HSC

5-6-1

HSCW Write HSC

5-6-2

OUT HSC (High Speed Counter)

3-13

OUT 24 segments HSC Interruption

5-10

RST HSC Reset

3-13

5-1．Functions Summary

XC series PLC has HSC (High Speed Counter) function which is independent

with the scan cycle. Via choosing different counter, test the high speed input signals

with detect sensors and rotary encoders. The highest testing frequency can reach

80KHz.

5-2．HSC Mode

XC series high speed counter’s function has three count modes: Increment Mode,

Pulse+Direction Mode and AB phase Mode;

Under this mode, count and input the pulse signal, the count value increase at each

pulse’s rising edge;

Under this mode, the pulse signal and direction signal are all inputted, the count value

increase or decrease with the direction signal’s status. When the count signal is OFF,

Increment Mode

Pulse+Direction Mode

the count input’s rising edge carry on plus count; When the count signal is ON, the

count input’s rising edge carry on minus count;

Under this mode, the HSC value increase or decrease according to two differential

signal (A phase and B phase). According to the multiplication, we have 1-time

frequency and 4-time frequency two modes, but the default count mode is 4-time

mode.

1-time frequency and 4-time frequency modes are shown below:

l 1-time Frequency

l 4-time Frequency

AB Phase Mode

5-3．HSC Range

HSC’s count range is: K-2,147,483,648 ~ K+2,147,483,647. If the count value

overflows this range, then up flow or down flow appears;

For “up flow”, it means the count value jumps from K+2,147,483,647 to be

K-2,147,483,648, then continue to count; For “down flow”, it means the count value

jumps from K-2,147,483,648 to be K+2,147,483,647 then continue to count.

5-4．HSC Input Wiring

For the counter’s pulse input wiring, things differ with different PLC model and

counter model; several typical input wiring are shown below: (take XC3-48 as the

example):

5-5．HSC ports assignment

Each letter’s Meaning:

U Dir A B

Pulse input Count Direction Judgment

(OFF=increment, ON=decrement)

A phase input B phase input

Normally, X0 and X1 can accept 80KHz frequency under single phase mode and AB phase

mode. Other terminals can accept only 10KHz under single phase mode, 5KHz under AB phase

mode. X can use as normal input terminals when they are not used as high speed input. The

detailed assignment is shown as below:

XC2 series PLC

Increment Pulse+Dir Input AB Phase Mode

C600 C602 C604 C606 C608 C610 C612 C614 C616 C618 C620 C622 C624 C626 C628 C630 C632 C634

Max.F 80K 80K 10K 10K 10K 80K 10K 80K 5K

4-times F √

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 U Dir B

X002

* C600、C620、C630 can support 80KHz with special requirement

X003 U U A

X004 Dir B

X005

X006 U

X007 U

X010

X011

X012

XC3-14 PLC


C600C602C604 C606 C608 C610 C612 C614 C616 C618C620C622 C624 C626 C628 C630C632 C634

*Max.F 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 5K

4-times F

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 Dir B

X002 U

X003 U

X004

X005 U

XC3-19AR-E


C600C602 C604 C606 C608 C610 C612C614 C616 C618 C620C622 C624 C626 C628 C630C632 C634

Max.F 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 5K 5K

4-times F √

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 Dir B

X002 U U A

X003 Dir B

X004 U

X005 U

XC3-24、32 PLC and XC5-48、60 PLC



Max.F 80K 80K 10K 10K 10K 10K 80K 10K 10K 80K 5K 5K

4-times F √ √

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √ √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 U Dir B

X002

X003 U U A

X004 Dir B

X005

X006 U U A

X007 Dir B

X010

X011 U

X012 U

XC3-48、60 PLC



Max.F 80K 80K 10K 10K 80K 80K 80K 80K

4-times F √

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 Dir B

X002 U U A

X003 Dir B

X004 U

X005 U

XC5-24/32 PLC、XCM-24/32 PLC



Max.F 80K 10K 80K 80K

4-times F √

Count

Interrupt √ √ √ √

X000 U U A

X001 Dir B

X002

X003 U

5-6．Read/Write HSC value

All high speed counters support read instruction [HSCR] and write instruction

[HSCW], but users need to use hardware V3.1c and above.

5-6-1．Read HSC value [HSCR]

1、Instruction Summary

Read HSC value to the specified register;

Read from HSC [HSCR]/ write to HSC [HSCW]

16 bits

Instruction

- 32 bits

Instruction

HSCR

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF,

rising/falling edge

Suitable

models

XC2、XC3、XC5、XCM

Hardware

requirement

V3.1c and above Software

requirement

-

2、Operands

Operands Function Type

S Specify HSC code 32 bits, BIN

D Specify the read/written register 32 bits, BIN

3、Suitable Soft Components

HSCR C630 D10M0

S· D·

X004

X005

X006

system constant module operands


S ●

D ●

word

FUNCTIONS AND ACTIONS

Sample Program:

5-6-2．Write HSC value [HSCW]


Write the specified register value into HSC;

Write HSC value [HSCW]

16 bits

Instruction

- 32 bits

Instruction

HSCW

Execution

condition

Normally ON/OFF,

rising/falling edge

Suitable

models


Hardware

requirement

V3.1c and above Software

requirement

-

2、operands


S Specify HSC code 32 bits, BIN

D Specify the read/written register 32 bits, BIN

3、suitable soft components

l When the activate condition is true, read the HSC value in C630 (DWORD) into

D10 (DWORD)

l Instruction HSCR read the HSC value into the specified register, improve HSC

value’s precision.

system constant module operands


S ●

D ●

word


HSCW C630 D20M0

S· D·

l When the activate condition is true, write the value in D20 (DWORD) into C630 (DWORD),

the original value is replaced;

l We suggest the users to apply high speed counter only with HSCR and HSCW, not with other

instructions like DMOV, LD>, DMUL etc. and users must run after converting HSC to be

other registers.

5-7．HSC Reset Mode

Reset HSC via software:

M0

M1

（）C600 K2000

（）C600

R↑

5-8．AB Phase counter multiplication setting

About AB phase counter, modify the frequency multiplication value via setting

FLASH data register FD8241, FD8242, FD8243. If the value is 1, it is 1-time

frequency, if it is 4, it is 4-time frequency.

In the above graph, when M0 is ON, C600 starts to count the input pulse on X0;

when M1 changes from OFF to be ON, reset C600, clear the count value

Register Function Set Value Meaning

1 1-time frequency FD8241 Frequency multiplication of C630

4 4-time frequency


4 4-time frequency


4 4-time frequency

5-9．HSC Example

Below, we take XC3-60 PLC as the example, to introduce HSC’s program form;

l When M0 is ON, C600 starts the HSC with the OFF→ON of X000;

l When comes the rising edge of M1, reset HSC C600

l When normally ON coil M8000 is ON, set the value of C600, the set value is

K888888888, read the HSC value (DWORD) into data register D0 (DWORD).

l If the value in C600 is smaller than value in D2, set the output coil Y0 ON; If the

value in C600 equals or be larger than value in D2, and smaller than value in D4,

set the output coil Y1 ON; If the value in C600 equals or be larger than value in

D4, set the output coil Y2 ON;

l When comes the rising edge of M1, reset HSC C600 and stop counting.

l When M4 is ON, C620 starts the HSC with the OFF→ON of X000; judge the

count direction according to the input X001 status (OFF or ON). If X001 is OFF,

it’s increment count; if X001 is ON, it’s decrement count;

l When comes the rising edge of M5, reset HSC C620 and stop counting.

Increment M

ode P

ulse+D

ir Mode

l When M8 is ON, C630 starts to count immediately. Count input via X000 (B

Phase)、X001 (A Phase)

l When the count value exceeds K3000, output coil Y2 is ON;

l When comes the rising edge of M9, reset HSC C630

l When therising edge of initial positive pulse coil M8002 comes, i.e. Each scan

cycle starts, HSC C630 reset and clear the count value.

l When set coil M8000 ON, C630 starts to count, the count value is set to be

K8888888。

l If the count value is greater than K0 but smaller than K100, the output coil Y0 set

ON; If the count value is greater thanK100 but smaller than K200时，the output

coil Y1 set ON; If the count value is greater thanK200, the output coilY2 set ON;

AB

phase mode

Counter Interruption tag

C630 I2501~I2524

C632 I2601~I2624

C634 I2701~I2724

C636 I2801~I2824

C638 I2901~I2924

5-10．高速计数中断

To XC series PLC, each HSC channels has 24 segments 32-bit pre-set value. When the HSC

difference value equals the correspond 24-segment pre-set value, then interruption occures

according to the interruption tag;

To use this function, please use hardware V3.1c or above;


（for the program about interruption, please refer chapter 5-10-4)

LD M0 //HSC activate condition M0 (interruption count condition)

OUT C600 K20000 D4000 //HSC value and set the start ID of 24-segment

LDP M1 //activate condition reset

RST C600 //HSC and 24-segment reset (interruption reset)

As shown in the above graph, data register D4000 is the start ID of 24-segment pre-set value

area. Behind it, save each pre-set value in DWORD form. Please pay attention when using HSC:

l If certain pre-set value is 0, it means count interruption stops at this segment;

l Set the interruption pre-set value but not write the correspond interruption program is not

allowed;

l 24-segment interruption of HSC occurs in order. I.e. If the first segment interruption

doesn't happen, then the second segment interruption will not happen;

l 24-segment pre-set value can be specified to be relative value or absolute value. Meantime,

users can specify the et value to be loop or not. But the oop mode can't be used together

with absolute value.


In the below table, we list each counter's 24-segment pre-set value to its interruption tag. E.e.:

24-segment pre-set value of counter C600 correspond with the interruption pointer: I1001、I1002、

I1003、⋯I1024.

Increment mode pulse+direction mode AB phase mode

5-10. HSC Interruption


C600 I1001~I1024

C602 I1101~I1124

C604 I1201~I1224

C606 I1301~I1324

C608 I1401~I1424


C620 I2001~I2024

C622 I2101~I2124

C624 I2201~I2224

C626 I2301~I2324

C628 I2401~I2424

5-10-1. Instruction Description

5-10-2. Interruption tags to HSC

C610 I1501~I1524

C612 I1601~I1624

C614 I1701~I1724

C616 I1801~I1824

C618 I1901~I1924

E.g. 1, the current value is C630 is 0, the first preset value is 10000, the preset value in

segment 2 is －5000, the preset value in segment 3 is 20000. When start to count, the counter's

current value is 10000, generate first interruption I2501; When start to count, the counter's current

value is 5000, generate first interruption I2502；When start to count, the counter's current value is

25000, generate first interruption I2503.

See graph below:

E.g. 2, the current value is C630 is 10000, the first preset value is 10000, the preset value in

segment 2 is 5000, the preset value in segment 3 is 20000. When start to count, the counter's

current value is 20000, generate first interruption I2501; When start to count, the counter's current

value is 25000, generate first interruption I2502；When start to count, the counter's current value is

45000, generate first interruption I2503.

See graph below:

HSC 24-segment pre-set value is the difference value, the count value

equals the counter's current value plus the preset value, generate the

interruption. N interruption tags correspond with N interruptionpreset

values. The (N+1) preset value is 0;

Define the presetvalue

C600= K5000+K20000=K25000

C600= K10000+（K-5000）=K5000

C600= K0+K10000=K10000

C630 D4000 D4001 D4002 D4003 D4004 D4005

K0 K10000 K-5000 K20000

I2501

I2502

I2503


Mode 1: Unicycle (normal mode)

Not happen after HSC interruption ends. The conditions below can re-start the interruption:

(1) reset the HSC

(2) Reboot the HSC activate condition

Mode 2: Continuous loop

Restart after HSC interruption ends. This mode is especially suitable for the following

application:

(1) continous back-forth movement

(2) Generate cycle interruption according to the defined pulse

Via setting he special auxiliary relays, users can set the HSC interruption to be unicycle mode

or continous loop mode. The loop mode is only suitable with the relative count. The detailed

assignment is show below:

ID HSC ID Setting

M8270 24 segments HSC interruption loop (C600)











OFF: unicycle mode

ON: continous loop mode

C600= K25000+K20000=K45000

C600= K20000+K5000=K25000

C600= K10000+K10000=K20000

C630 D4000 D4001 D4002 D4003 D4004 D4005

K10000 K10000 K5000 K20000

I2501

I2502

I2503

5-10-3. Loop mode of HSC Interruption









E.g.2：Application on knit-weaving machine (continous loop mode)

The system theory is shown as below: Control the inverter via PLC, thereby control the motor.

Meantime, via the feedback signal from encoder, control the knit-weaving machine and realize the

precise position.

5-10-4. Example of HSC Interruption

Below is PLC program: Y2 represents forward output signal; Y3 represents backward output

signal; Y4 represents output signal of speed 1; C340: Back-forth times accumulation counter;

C630: AB phase HSC;

FEND

I2501

M8000 Y4S

IRET

IRET

M8000( )

M8285S

Y2S( )

Y2

OUT C340 K1000000

DMOV K75000 D4000

M8000

DMOV K15000 D4002

DMOV K-75000 D4004

DMOV K-15000 D4006

M8000

OUT C630 D4000K30000000

M8000HSCR C630 D200

( )

I2502

M8000 Y4R( )

Y2R( )

Y3S( )

I2503

M8000 Y4S( )

IRET

I2504

IRET

M8000 Y3R( )

Y4R( )

Y2S( )

Instruction List Form:

LD M8002 //M8002 is initial positive pulse coil

SET M8285 //special auxiliary relay set ON, to enable C630 continuous loop

SET Y2 //set output coil Y2 (i.e. Start run forth)

LDP Y2 //knit-weaving machine back-forth times counter's activate condition Y2 (forth rising edge activate)

OUT C340 K1000000 //counter C340 starts to count

LD M8000 //M8000 is normally ON coil

DMOV K75000 D4000 //set segment-1 ID D4000 to be K75000，

DMOV K15000 D4002 //set segment-2 D4002 to be K15000，

DMOV K-75000 D4004 //set segment-3 D4004 to be K-75000，

DMOV K-15000 D4006 //set segment-4 D4004 to be K-15000，


OUT C630 K30000000 D4000 //HSC and start ID of 24-segment


HSCR C630 D200 //read the HSC value of C630 to D200

FEND //main program end

I2501 //interruption tag of segment 1


SET Y4 //output coil Y4 set (low-speed run with speed 1)

IRET //interruption return tag

I2502 ///interruption tag of segment 2


RST Y4 //output coil Y4 reset (low-speed run stop)

RST Y2 //output coil Y2 reset (run forward stops)

SET Y3 //output coil Y3 set (back running)




SET Y4 //output coil Y4 set (low-speed run with speed 1)




RST Y3 //output coil Y3 reset (back running stop)

RST Y4 //output coil Y4 reset (low-speed run stop)

SET Y2 //output coil Y2 set (run forward)


6 PULSE OUTPUT

In this chapter we tell the pulse function of XC series PLC. The content includes pulse output instructions, input/output wiring, notes and relate coils and registers etc.


6-2．Pulse Output Types and Instructions

6-3．Output Wiring

6-4．Notes

6-5．Sample Programs

6-6．Coils and Registers Relate To Pulse Output

Pulse Output Instructions List

Mnemonic Function Circuit And Soft Device Chapter

PULSE OUTPUT

PLSY

Unidirectional ration pulse output without ACC/DEC time change

PLSY S1 S2 D 6-2-1

PLSF Variable frequency pulse output

PLSF S D 6-2-2

PLSR

Ration pulse output with ACC/DEC speed

PLSR S1 S2 S3 D 6-2-3

PLSNEXT/ PLSNT

Pulse Section Switch

PLSNT S 6-2-4

STOP Pulse Stop STOP S 6-2-5

PLSMV Refresh Pulse Nr. immediately

PLSMV S D 6-2-6

ZRN Original Return

ZRN S1 S2 S3 D 6-2-7

DRVI Relative Position Control

DRVI S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 6-2-8

DRVA Absolute Position Control

DRVA S1 S2 S3 D1 D2 6-2-9

PLSA

Absolute Position multi-section pulse control

PLSA S1 S2 D 6-2-10

PTO

Relative position multi-section pulse control

6-2-11

PTOA Absolute position 6-2-12

PTO D0 Y0M0 S1· D1·

Y1

D2·

PTOA D0 Y0M0 S1· D1·

Y1

D2·

multi-section pulse control

PSTOP Pulse stop

6-2-13

PTF

Variable frequency single-section pulse output

6-2-14

6-1．Functions Summary Generally, XC3 and XC5 series PLC are equipped with 2CH pulse output function. Via different instructions, users can realize unidirectional pulse output without ACC/DEC speed; unidirectional pulse output with ACC/DEC speed; multi-segments, positive/negative output etc., the output frequency can reach 200K Hz.

※1: To use pulse output, please choose PLC with transistor output, like XC3-14T-E

or XC3-60RT-E etc. ※2: XC5 series 32I/O PLC has 4CH (Y0, Y1, Y2, Y3) pulse output function. ※3: XCM series 32/24 have 4 CH pulse output; XCC series has 5 CH pulse output; XCM-60 has 10 CH pulse output. ※4: Pulse output terminal Y1 cannot be used together with expansion BD.

PSTOP Y0 K1M0

S1· S2·

PTF D0 Y0M0

S1· D1·

Y1

D2·

6-2．Pulse Output Types and Instructions

6-2-1．Unidirectional ration pulse output without ACC/DEC time change [PLSY]

1、Instruction Summary Instruction to generate ration pulse with the specified frequency;

Unidirectional ration pulse output without ACC/DEC time change [PLSY] 16 bits instruction

PLSY 32 bits instruction

DPLSY

Execution condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable models

XC2, XC3, XC5, XCM, XCC

Hardwarere quirement

- Software requirements

-

2、Operands

Operands Function Type S1 Specify the frequency’s value or register ID 16 bits/32 bits, BIN S2 Specify the pulse number or register’s ID 16 bits /32 bits, BIN D Specify the pulse output port bit

3、Suitable soft components 《16 bits instruction》

PLSY K30 D1 Y0M0

S1· S2· D·

M8170RST M0

operands system constant module


S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit


Frequency Range: 0~32767Hz； Pulse Quantity Range: 0~K32767； Pulse output from Y000 or Y001 only; When M0 is ON, PLSY instruction output 30Hz pulse at Y0, the pulse

number is decided by D1, M8170 is set ON only when sending the pulse.

《32 bits instruction》

DPLSY K30 D1 Y0M0

S1· S2· D·

M8170RST M0

《continuous or limited pulse number》

When finish sending the set pulse number, stop outputting automatically

Note: T1 is pulse start time, T2 is pulse end time.

Frequency Range: 0~200KHz； Pulse Quantity Range: 0~K2147483647； Pulse output from Y000 or Y001 only; When M0 is ON, DPLSY instruction output 30Hz pulse at Y0, the pulse

number is decided by D2D1, M8170 is set ON only when sending the pulse. When the output pulse number reaches the set value, stop sending the pulse, M8170 is set to be OFF, reset M0;

Output Mode

Limited pulse output

Set pulse number

Example

Pulse frequency=1000Hz, pulse quantity 20K, no acceleration/deceleration and single direction pulse output:

Note: D0 is pulse frequency, D2 is pulse quantity. D0=1000, D2=20000. If the control object is stepping/servo motor, we recommend users not use this instruction, to avoid the motor losing synchronism. PLSR is available.

6-2-2．Variable Pulse Output [PLSF] PLSF has 4 control modes. Mode 1: changeable frequency continuous pulse output PLSF 1、Instruction Summary

Instruction to generate continuous pulse in the form of variable frequency Variable Pulse Output [PLSF] 16 bits Instruction

PLSF 32 bits Instruction

DPLSF

Execution condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable Models


Hardware requirement

- Software requirement

-

2、Operands


Items to Note

S Specify the frequency or register ID 16 bits/32 bits, BIN D Specify pulse output port bit

3、suitable soft components 《16 bit instruction form》

PLSF D0 Y0M0

S· D·

《32 bit instruction form》

DPLSF D0 Y0M0

S· D·

Frequency range: 5Hz~200KHz (when the set frequency is lower than 5Hz, output 5Hz) Pulse can only be output at Y0 or Y1. With the changing of setting frequency in D0, the output pulse frequency changes at Y0 Accumulate pulse number in register D8170 (DWord) There is no acceleration/deceleration time when the frequency changed When the condition is on, it output the pulse with changeable frequency until the condition is

off. It is fit for changeable frequency continuous pulse output.

Frequency range: 5Hz~32767Hz (when the set frequency is lower than 5Hz, output 5Hz) Pulse can only be output at Y0 or Y1. With the changing of setting frequency in D0, the output pulse frequency changes at Y0 Accumulate pulse number in register D8170 (DWord) When pulse frequency is 0, the pulse output end There is no acceleration/deceleration time when the frequency changed When the condition is on, it output the pulse with changeable frequency until the

condition is off. It is fit for changeable frequency continuous pulse output.



S ● ● ● ● ●

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit


Output Mode

Continuous output pulse with the set frequency until stop output via the instruction

Note: T1 is pulse start time, T2 is pulse end time. Mode2: changeable frequency continuous pulse output (with direction) PLSF 1、Instruction Summary

Instruction to generate continuous pulse in the form of variable frequency (with direction) Variable Pulse Output (with direction) [PLSF] 16 bits Instruction


DPLSF

Execution condition




V3.3 and above Software requirement

V3.3 and above

2、Operands

Operands Function Type S Specify the frequency or register ID 16 bits/32 bits, BIN D1 Specify pulse output port bit D2 Specify pulse direction output port bit


Continuous pulse output


PLSF D0 Y0M0

S· D1·

Y2

D2·

Frequency range: 5Hz~32767Hz (when the set frequency is lower than 5Hz, output 5Hz) Pulse can only be output at Y0 or Y1. The negative/positive of pulse frequency decides the pulse direction ( direction port output

when the frequency is positive) The direction output can control the rotation direction of motor (CW/CCW) With the changing of setting frequency in D0, the output pulse frequency changes at Y0 Accumulate pulse number in register D8170 (DWord) There is no acceleration/deceleration time when the frequency changed When the condition is on, it output the pulse with changeable frequency until the condition is

off. It is fit for changeable frequency continuous pulse output. 《32 bit instruction form》

Frequency range: 5Hz~200KHz (when the set frequency is lower than 5Hz, output 5Hz) Pulse can only be output at Y0 or Y1. The negative/positive of pulse frequency decides the pulse direction ( direction port output

when the frequency is positive) The direction output can control the rotation direction of motor (CW/CCW) With the changing of setting frequency in D0, the output pulse frequency changes at Y0 Accumulate pulse number in register D8170 (DWord) There is no acceleration/deceleration time when the frequency changed When the condition is on, it output the pulse with changeable frequency until the condition is

off. It is fit for changeable frequency continuous pulse output.



S ● ● ● ● ●

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Bit


Continuous output pulse with the set frequency until stop output via the instruction

Note: T1 and T3 is pulse start time, T2 and T4 is pulse end time. Mode3: changeable frequency limited quantity pulse output PLSF 1、Instruction Summary

Instruction to generate changeable frequency limited quantity pulse Variable frequency limited quantity pulse output [PLSF] 16 bits Instruction


DPLSF

Execution condition





V3.3 and above

2、Operands

Operands Function Type S1 Specify the frequency or register ID 16 bits/32 bits, BIN S2 Specify pulse quantity or register ID 16 bits/32 bits, BIN D Specify pulse output port bit



Output Mode


PLSF D0 D2M0

S1· S2·

Y0

D·

M8170RST M0

Frequency range: 5Hz~32767Hz (when the set frequency is lower than 5Hz, output 5Hz) Pulse quantity range: K0~K32767 Pulse can only be output at Y0 or Y1 With the changing of setting frequency in D0, the output pulse frequency changes at Y0 When the pulse frequency is 0Hz, the pulse output end Accumulate pulse number in register D8170 (DWord) There is no acceleration/deceleration time when the frequency changed When the condition is on, it output the pulse with changeable frequency until the condition is

off. It is fit for changeable frequency limited quantity pulse output. When M0 is ON, PLSF output the pulse at Y0 with frequency D0 (word), pulse quantity D2

(word). M8170 is ON when the pulse is outputting. The pulse stops output when the pulse quantity reaches the limit value. And the M8170 is off, M0 is off.


DPLSF D0 D2M0

S1· S2·

Y0

D·

M8170RST M0

Frequency range: 5Hz~200KHz (when the set frequency is lower than 5Hz, output 5Hz) Pulse quantity range: K0~K2147483647 Pulse can only be output at Y0 or Y1 With the changing of setting frequency in D0, the output pulse frequency changes at Y0



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

Bit


When the pulse frequency is 0Hz, the pulse output end Accumulate pulse number in register D8170 (DWord) There is no acceleration/deceleration time when the frequency changed When the condition is on, it output the pulse with changeable frequency until the condition is

off. It is fit for changeable frequency limited quantity pulse output. When M0 is ON, PLSF output the pulse at Y0 with frequency D0 (Dword), pulse quantity D2

(Dword). M8170 is ON when the pulse is outputting. The pulse stops output when the pulse quantity reaches the limit value. And the M8170 is off, M0 is off.

Continuous output pulse with the set frequency and limited pulse quantity

Note: T1 is pulse start time, T2 is pulse end time. Mode4: changeable frequency limited quantity pulse output PLSF (with direction) 1、Instruction Summary

Instruction to generate changeable frequency limited quantity pulse (with direction) Variable frequency limited quantity pulse output (with direction) [PLSF] 16 bits Instruction


DPLSF

Execution condition





V3.3 and above

2、Operands

Operands Function Type S1 Specify the frequency or register ID 16 bits/32 bits, BIN S2 Specify pulse quantity or register ID 16 bits/32 bits, BIN


Output Mode

When the pulse quantity

reaches the limited value,

the pulse stop output

D1 Specify pulse output port bit D2 Specify pulse direction output port bit


PLSF D0 D2M0

S1· S2·

Y0

D1·

M8170RST M0

Y2

D2·

Frequency range: 5Hz~32767Hz (when the set frequency is lower than 5Hz, output 5Hz) Pulse quantity range: K0~K32767 Pulse can only be output at Y0 or Y1 The negative/positive of pulse frequency decides the pulse direction ( direction port output

when the frequency is positive) The direction output can control the rotation direction of motor (CW/CCW) With the changing of setting frequency in D0, the output pulse frequency changes at Y0 When the pulse frequency is 0Hz, the pulse output end Accumulate pulse number in register D8170 (DWord) There is no acceleration/deceleration time when the frequency changed When the condition is on, it output the pulse with changeable frequency until the condition is

off. It is fit for changeable frequency limited quantity pulse output. When M0 is ON, PLSF output the pulse at Y0 with frequency D0 (word), pulse quantity D2

(word). M8170 is ON when the pulse is outputting. The pulse stops output when the pulse quantity reaches the limit value. And the M8170 is off, M0 is off.




S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Bit


DPLSF D0 D2M0

S1· S2·

Y0

D1·

M8170RST M0

Y2

D2·

Frequency range: 5Hz~200KHz (when the set frequency is lower than 5Hz, output 5Hz) Pulse quantity range: K0~K2147483647 Pulse can only be output at Y0 or Y1 With the changing of setting frequency in D0, the output pulse frequency changes at Y0 When the pulse frequency is 0Hz, the pulse output end Accumulate pulse number in register D8170 (DWord) There is no acceleration/deceleration time when the frequency changed When the condition is on, it output the pulse with changeable frequency until the condition is

off. It is fit for changeable frequency limited quantity pulse output. When M0 is ON, PLSF output the pulse at Y0 with frequency D0 (Dword), pulse quantity D2

(Dword). M8170 is ON when the pulse is outputting. The pulse stops output when the pulse quantity reaches the limit value. And the M8170 is off, M0 is off.

Continuous output pulse with the set frequency and limited pulse quantity


Output Mode

When the pulse quantity

reaches the limited value,

the pulse stop output

When the pulse quantity reaches the limited

value, the pulse stop output

6-2-3．Multi-segment pulse control at relative position [PLSR] PLSR/DPLSR instruction has two control modes. Below we will introduce one by one; Mode 1: segment single direction pulse output PLSR 1、Instruction Summary

Generate certain pulse quantity (segmented) with the specified frequency and acceleration/deceleration time Segmented single direction pulse output [PLSR] 16 bits Instruction

PLSR 32 bits Instruction

DPLSR

Execution condition





-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the soft component’s start ID of the segmented

pulse parameters 16 bit/ 32 bit, BIN

S2 Specify acceleration/deceleration time or soft component’s ID

16 bit/ 32 bit, BIN

D Specify the pulse output port Bit





S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit

Functions And A

PLSR D0 D100 Y0

RST M0

M0

M8170

S1· S2· D·


DPLSR D0 D100 Y0

RST M0

M0

M8170

S1· S2· D·

Note: the address of pulse segment must be continuous and the pulse frequency and quantity of segment N+1 must be 0. Acceleration/deceleration time address cannot behind segment N.

M8170

M0

Segment 1D0, D1

Segment 2D2, D3

Segment 3D4, D5

The parameters’ address is a section starts from Dn or FDn. In the above example (16bit instruction form): D0 set the first segment pulse’s highest frequency, D1 set the first segment’s pulse number, D2 set the second segment pulse’s highest frequency, D3 set the second segment’s pulse number, …… if the set value in Dn, Dn+1 is 0, this represents the end of segment, the segment number is not limited.

For 32 bit instruction DPLSR, D0, D1 set the first segment pulse’s highest frequency, D2, D3 set the first segment’s pulse number, D4, D5 set the second segment pulse’s highest frequency, D6, D7 set the second segment’s pulse number……

Acceleration/deceleration time is the time from the start to the first segment’s highest frequency. Meantime, it defines the slope of all segment’s frequency to time. In this way the following acceleration/deceleration will perform according to this slope.

Pulse can be output at only Y000 or Y001 Frequency range: 0~32767Hz (16 bits instruction), 0~200KHz (32 bits instruction) Acceleration/deceleration time : 0~65535 ms

Name Pulse frequency (Hz) Pulse quantity Segment 1 1000 2000 Segment 2 200 1000 Segment 3 3000 6000 Segment 4 800 1600 Segment 5 100 800 Segment 6 1200 3000 Acceleration/deceleration time 100ms

Use 32-bit instruction DPLSR, the address is shown as the following table: Name Pulse

frequency(Hz) Frequency address (Dword)

Pulse quantity pulse quantity address (Dword)

Segment 1 1000 D1, D0 2000 D3, D2 Segment 2 200 D5, D4 1000 D7, D6 Segment 3 3000 D9, D8 6000 D11, D10 Segment 4 800 D13, D12 1600 D15, D14 Segment 5 100 D17, D16 800 D19, D18 Segment 6 1200 D21, D20 3000 D23, D22 Acceleration/deceleration time

100ms D51, D0

Note: the 4 registers behind segment 6 must be 0 (D27, D26, D25, D24), which means the pulse

output end; for 16 bits instruction, D25, D24 must be 0.

Example Send 6 segments of pulse, the pulse frequency and quantity please see below table:

Mode 2: segmented dual-direction pulse output PLSR 1、Instruction Summary Generate certain pulse quantity with the specified frequency、acceleration/deceleration time and pulse direction;

Segmented dual-directional pulse output [PLSR] 16 bits Instruction

PLSR 32 bits Instruction

DPLSR

Execution condition





-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the soft component’s start ID of the segmented pulse

parameters 16 bit/ 32 bit, BIN

S2 Specify acceleration/deceleration time or soft component’s ID 16 bit/ 32 bit, BIN

D1 Specify the pulse output port Bit D2 Specify the pulse output direction’s port Bit


PLSR D0 D100 Y0

RST M0

M0

M8170

S1· S2·

Y3

D1· D2·

The parameters’ address is a section starts from Dn or FDn. In the above example: D0 set the

first segment pulse’s highest frequency, D1 set the first segment’s pulse number，D2 set the second segment pulse’s highest frequency, D3 set the second segment’s pulse number, …… if the set value in Dn, Dn+1 is 0, this represents the end of segment, the segment number is not limited.

For 32 bit instruction DPLSR, D0, D1 set the first segment pulse’s highest frequency, D2, D3 set the first segment’s pulse number, D4, D5 set the second segment pulse’s highest frequency, D6, D7 set the second segment’s pulse number……




S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● K

Word

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Bit


Pulse can be output at only Y0 or Y1 Pulse direction output terminal Y can be specified freely. E.g.: if in S1 (the first segment) the

pulse number is positive, Y output is ON; if the pulse number is negative, Y output is OFF; Note: the pulse direction is decided by the pulse number’s nature (positive or negative) of the first segment.

Frequency range: 0~32767Hz (16 bits), 0~200KHz (32 bits) Pulse number range: 0~K32,767 (16 bits instruction), 0~K2,147,483,647 (32 bits instruction) Acceleration/deceleration time : below 65535 ms

M8170

M0

Segment 1D0, D1

Segment 2D2, D3

Segment 3D4, D5

Name Pulse frequency (Hz) Pulse quantity Segment 1 1000 2000 Segment 2 200 1000 Segment 3 3000 6000 Segment 4 800 1600 Segment 5 100 800 Segment 6 1200 3000 Acceleration/deceleration time 100ms

Use 32bits instruction DPLSR, the address is shown as the following table: Name Pulse frequency

(Hz) Frequency address (Dword)

Pulse quantity Pulse quantity address (Dword)

Segment 1 1000 D1, D0 2000 D3, D2 Segment 2 200 D5, D4 1000 D7, D6 Segment 3 3000 D9, D8 6000 D11, D10 Segment 4 800 D13, D12 1600 D15, D14 Segment 5 100 D17, D16 800 D19, D18 Segment 6 1200 D21, D20 3000 D23, D22 Acceleration/ 100ms D51, D0

例 6 segments pulse output. The pulse frequency and quantity are shown in the following table:

deceleration time Note: the 4 registers behind segment 6 must be 0 (D27, D26, D25, D24), which means the pulse

output end; for 16 bits instruction, D25, D24 must be 0.

6-2-4．Pulse Segment Switch [PLSNEXT]/[PLSNT] 1、Instruction Summary

Enter the next segment of pulse output;

Pulse segment switch [PLSNEXT]/[PLSNT] 16 bits Instruction

PLSNEXT/PLSNT 32 bits Instruction

-

Execution condition

Rising/falling edge Suitable Models




-

2、Operands

Operands Function Type D Specify the pulse output port Bit


Y0PLSNEXTM1

PLSR D0 D100 Y0M0

D

If the pulse output reaches the highest frequency at the current segment, and output steadily at this frequency; when M1 changes from OFF to ON, then enter the next pulse output with the acceleration/deceleration time; (this instruction is suitable for multi-segment pulse output)

Run the instruction within the acceleration/deceleration time is invalid Instruction PLSNT is the same to PLSNEXT

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit


The object needs to move from A to B to C. The speed of the three segments is different. The position of A, B and C is uncertain. We can use DPLSR and PLSNEXT to make this program. We can use proximity switch in position A, B, C. Connect the proximity to PLC terminal X1, X2, X3. Pulse frequency terminal is Y0, pulse direction terminal is Y2.

Name Pulse frequency (Hz)

Frequency address (Dword)

Pulse quantity Pulse quantity address (Dword)

Segment origin-A 1000 D1, D0 999999999 D3, D2 Segment A-B 3000 D5, D4 999999999 D7, D6 Segment B-C 2000 D9, D8 999999999 D11, D10 Acceleration/ deceleration time

30ms D31, D30

Note: the pulse quantity should be set to a large value to ensure it can reach the proximity switch. Please clear the 4 registers behind segment 3. (D15, D14, D13, D12).

-------- the dashed line represents the original pulse output

Example

Diagram:

6-2-5．Pulse Stop [STOP] 1、Instruction Summary

Stop pulse output immediately; Pulse stop [STOP] 16 bits Instruction

STOP 32 bits Instruction

-

Execution condition

Rising/falling edge Suitable Models




-

2、Operands

Operands Function Type D Specify the port to stop pulse output Bit


D0PLSR D100 Y0M0

M1

M8170

STOP Y0

RST M0

D

When M0 changes from OFF to be ON, PLSR output pulse at Y0. D0 specify the frequency,

D1 specify the pulse number, D100 specify the acceleration/deceleration time; when the output pulse number reaches the set value, stop outputting the pulse; on the rising edge of M1, STOP instruction stops outputting the pulse at Y0;

When STOP works, the pulse will stop at once even the M0 is not off.

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit


6-2-6．Refresh the pulse number at the port [PLSMV] 1、Instruction Summary

Refresh the pulse number at the port; Refresh the pulse number at the port [PLSMV] 16 bits Instruction

- 32 bits Instruction

PLSMV

Execution condition





-

2、Operands

Operands Function Type S Specify the pulse number or soft components’ ID 32bit, BIN D Specify the port to refresh the pulse Bit


operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Bit



S ● ● ● ● ●

Word


When the working table is moving backward, it gets the origin signal X2, execute the

external interruption, PLSMV command run immediately, not effected by the scan cycle. Refresh the pulse number from Y0 and send to D8170;

This instruction is used to clear the accumulation difference caused in pulse control; PLSMV instruction is only for PLSR and DPLSR.

6-2-7．Back to the Origin [ZRN] Method 1: Simple ZRN


Back to the Origin Back to the Origin [ZRN] 16 bits Instruction

ZRN 32 bits Instruction

DZRN

Execution condition





-


2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the backward speed or soft components’ ID 16/32bit, BIN S2 Specify the creeping speed or soft components’ ID 16/32 bit, BIN S3 Specify the soft components’ ID of the close point’s signal Bit D Specify the pulse output port Bit



operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S3 ● ●

D ●

Word


Bit



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Pulse output address: Y0 or Y1 only; XC5 series is Y0~Y3, 3 axis is Y0~Y2, 10 axis is Y0~Y11.

S1 and S2 direction is same and the absolute value of S1 is greater than S2; After driving the instruction, move to signal X3 with origin returning speed S1; When the closed point signal turns from OFF to be ON, decrease the speed to be S2; When the closed point signal X3 turns from OFF to ON, accelerate from origin returning

speed to creeping speed S2. When the closed point signal X3 turns from ON to be OFF, after one scanning period, write

to registers (Y0:[D8171,D8170]=0,Y1:[D8174,D8173]=0) when stopping pulse output; No acceleration/deceleration time when the instruction works at the beginning, the pulse

frequency changes from 0Hz to S1 suddenly The decrease time can be specified by D8230~D8239; please refer to chapter 6-6 for details; Method 2: High precision ZRN

1、Summary

High precision back to the origin Back to the origin [ZRN] 16 bits - 32 bits ZRN Execution condition

Normally ON/OFF coil Suitable models


Hardware V3.3 and higher Software V3.3 and higher

2、Operand

Operand Function Type S0 Soft element head address of origin back data block 32 bits, BIN S1 Soft element address of limit signal bit S2 Soft element address of origin auxiliary signal bit S3 Soft element address of origin signal (external

interruption) bit

S4 Soft element address of Z phase signal (external interruption)

bit

D1 Address of pulse output terminal bit D2 Address of pulse output direction terminal bit

3、Suitable soft element

Operand System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S1、S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3、S4 ●

D1、D2 ●

Word

Bit

operand System constant Module


S0 ● ● ● ●

《Mode1: no Z phase signal》

《Mode2: with Z phase signal》

Parameter address distribution: (32 bits, 2 bytes) S0 ：back to origin speed VH S0+2 ：back to origin speed VL S0+4 ：creep speed S0+6 ：slope of pulse rising and falling S0+8 ：initial pulses after back to origin (D8170) S0+10：Z phase count value (for mode2) （A）back start point is behind the origin Mode1: Description: Move towards the origin with speed VH. If it encounters origin auxiliary signal S2, it will decelerate to speed VL with the slope K

(note: if it encounters the origin when decelerating from VH to VL, please modify the pulse slope or origin position to avoid it).

Keep forward with the current speed VL. Decelerate to 0 with the slope K after touching the origin. Start to delay (delay time is FD8209, unit is ms). It accelerates to creep speed with the slope

Description ZRN D0 X0 X1

M0S2·

X2

S3S0·

Y0 Y1

D1 D2S1·

ZRN D0 X0 X1M0

S2·

X2

S3S0·

X3 Y0

D1 D2S1·

Y1

S4·

VL

Slope

VH

Speed=0

Limit Origin Origin auxiliary

Creep speed

K after delaying. Move in reverse direction with creep speed. Stop origin returning when it leaves the origin with creep speed.

Change the pulses (D8170) to setting value.

Note: in this mode, please keep the origin limit switch ON during the process (from touching the origin limit switch at speed VL to stop origin returning)

Mode2:

VL

Slope VH

Speed=0


Creep speed

Count for Z phase signal

Description: Move towards origin with speed VH. If it encounters origin auxiliary signal S2, decelerate to speed VL with slope K. Move forward at speed VL. Decelerate to 0 with slope K when encountering the origin. Start to delay (the delay time is FD8209, unit is ms). Accelerate to creep speed with the slope

K. Move in reverse direction at creep speed. Stop Z phase counting when leaving the origin at creep speed. Stop origin returning when Z phase cumulative value is equal to setting value.



（B）the start point is ahead the origin, with limit signal Mode1:

VLSlope

VH

Speed=0


Creep speed

VH

Slope

Description: Move towards origin at speed VH, when touching the limit switch, it decelerate to 0 with

slope K. Start to delay (delay time is FD8209, the unit is ms). Accelerate to speed VH with slope K

after delaying. Run at speed VH. Decelerate to 0 with slope K when encountering origin. Accelerate to speed VL with slope K and move towards origin. Decelerate to 0 with slope K when touching the origin. Start to delay (delay time is FD8209, the unit is ms). Accelerate to creep speed with slope K. Stop after leaving the origin at creep speed.



Mode2:

VLSlope

VH

Speed=0


Creep speed

VH

Slope

Count for Z phase signal

Description: Move towards origin at speed VH, decelerate to 0 with slope K when touching the limit

signal. Start to delay (delay time is FD8209, the unit is ms). Accelerate to speed VH with slope K

after delaying. Run at speed VH. Decelerate to 0 with slope K when encountering the origin. Accelerate to speed VL with slope K and move toward origin. Decelerate to 0 with slope K when touching the origin. Start to delay (delay time is FD8209, the unit is ms). Accelerate to creep speed with slope K

after delaying. Start to count Z phase signal after leaving origin at creep speed. Stop origin returning when cumulative value of Z phase signal is equal to setting value. Change the pulses to setting value. (D8170)


6-2-8．Relative position single-segment pulse control [DRVI] 1、Instruction Summary

Relative position single-segment pulse control;

Relative position single-segment pulse control [DRVI] 16 bits Instruction

DRVI 32 bits Instruction

DDRVI

Execution condition





-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the output pulse value or soft components ID 16/32bit, BIN S2 Specify the output pulse frequency or soft components ID 16/32 bit, BIN D1 Specify the pulse output port Bit D2 Specify the pulse output direction port Bit



Pulse output ID: only Y0 or Y1; XC5 series is Y0~Y3, 3 axis is Y0~Y2, 10 axis is Y0~Y11 Pulse output direction can specify any Y; Acceleration/deceleration time is specified by D8230 (single word) The relative drive form means: move from the current position (the distance from current

position to target position);

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Word


Bit



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Confirm the value of current position registers before executing the instruction (D8171, D8170[Y0]/ D8174, D8173[Y1] ……)

The current position of X axis is (100, 0), it will move to target position (3000, 0) at the speed of 1000Hz, pulse output terminal is Y0, direction terminal is Y4. The distance between current position and target position is 2900=3000-100. The DRVI executing diagram is shown as below:

Program:

Example

6-2-9．Absolute position single-segment pulse control [DRVA] 1、Instruction Summary

Absolute position single-segment pulse control Absolute position single-segment pulse control [DRVA] 16 bits Instruction

DRVA 32 bits Instruction

DDRVA

Execution condition





-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the output pulse value or soft components ID 16/32bit, BIN S2 Specify the output pulse frequency or soft components ID 16/32 bit, BIN D1 Specify the pulse output port Bit D2 Specify the pulse output direction port Bit



operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Word


Bit



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

(Y0:[D8171,D8170],Y1:[D8174,D8173])

Pulse output ID: only Y0 or Y1; XC5 series is Y0~Y3, 3 axis is Y0~Y2, 10 axis is Y0~Y11 Pulse output direction can specify any Y; Acceleration/deceleration time is specified by D8230 (single word) The relative drive form means: move from the origin position (the position from origin to

target position); Confirm the value of current position registers (D8171, D8170[Y0]/ D8174,

D8173[Y1] ……)

The current position of X axis is (100, 0), it will move to target position (3000, 0) at the speed of 1000Hz, pulse output terminal is Y0, direction terminal is Y4. The distance between origin and target position is 3000. The DRVA executing diagram is shown as below:

Program:

Example

6-2-10．Absolute position multi-segment pulse control [PLSA] PLSA/DPLSA has two control modes, below we will introduce one by one; Mode 1: uni-directional pulse output PLSA 1、Instruction Summary Generate absolute position segmented pulse with the specified frequency, acceleration/deceleration time and pulse direction;

Absolute position multi-segment pulse control [PLSA] 16 bits Instruction

PLSA 32 bits Instruction

DPLSA

Execution condition





-

2、Operands

Operands Function Type S1 Specify the soft component’s number to output the pulse

parameters 16/32bit, BIN

S2 Specify the acceleration/deceleration time or soft component’s number

16/32 bit, BIN

D Specify the pulse output port Bit


operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

Word

Bit



S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● K




first segment pulse’s highest frequency、D1 set the first segment’s absolute position，D2 set the second segment pulse’s highest frequency、D3 set the second segment’s absolute position，…… if the set value in Dn、Dn+1 is 0, this represents the end of segment, we can set 24 segments in total;

For 32 bits instruction DPLSA, D0, D1 set the first segment pulse highest frequency, D2,D3 set the first segment pulse quantity, D4, D5 set the second segment pulse highest frequency, D6,D7 set the second segment pulse quantity……. If the setting value of Dn, Dn+1, Dn+2, Dn+3 are 0, it means the end of the segment. It can set 24 segments in total.


Pulse can be output at only Y0 or Y1; XC5 series is Y0~Y3, 3 axis is Y0~Y2, 10 axis is Y0~Y11;

Frequency range: 0~32767Hz (16 bits instruction), 0~200KHz (32 bits instruction) Pulse number range: K0~K32,767 (16 bits instruction), K0~K2,147,483,647 (32 bits

instruction) Confirm the value in current position registers (D8171, D8170[Y0]/ D8174,

D8173[Y1] ……) Note: if the segment quantity is n, the address of the segments must be continuous, and the pulse frequency and quantity of n+1 segment must be 0. It means the pulse output end. The address of acceleration/deceleration time cannot follow the segment n.


Output 6 segments of pulse through instruction DPLSA. Y0 is pulse output terminal.

Name Frequency (Hz) Absolution position Segment 1 1000 2000 Segment 2 200 3000 Segment 3 3000 9000 Segment 4 800 10600 Segment 5 100 11400 Segment 6 1200 14400 Acceleration/deceleration time 100ms

Use 32 bits instruction DPLSA: Name Frequency


Absolution position

Absolution position address (Dword)

Segment 1 1000 D1、D0 2000 D3、D2 Segment 2 200 D5、D4 3000 D7、D6 Segment 3 3000 D9、D8 9000 D11、D10 Segment 4 800 D13、D12 10600 D15、D14 Segment 5 100 D17、D16 11400 D19、D18 Segment 6 1200 D21、D20 14400 D23、D22 Acceleration/deceleration time

100ms D51、D0

Note: the 4 registers after segment 6 must be 0. (D27, D26, D25, D24).It means the pulse output

end. For 16 bits instruction PLSA, 2 registers after segment 6 must be 0.

F Hz

3000

1200

1000

800

200100

0 2000 3000 9000 10600 11400 14400

Example

Program:

Mode2: dual-directional pulse output PLSA 1、Instruction Summary Generate absolute position pulse with the specified frequency, acceleration/deceleration time and pulse direction;

Absolute position multi-segment pulse control [PLSA] 16 bits Instruction

PLSA 32 bits Instruction

DPLSA

Execution condition





-

2、Operands

Operands Function Type S1 Specify the soft component’s number to output the pulse

parameters 16/32bit, BIN

S2 Specify the acceleration/deceleration time or soft component’s number

16/32 bit, BIN

D1 Specify the pulse output port Bit D2 Specify the pulse direction port Bit




first segment pulse’s highest frequency、D1 set the first segment’s absolute position，D2 set the second segment pulse’s highest frequency、D3 set the second segment’s absolute position，…… if the set value in Dn、Dn+1 is 0, this represents the end of segment, we can set 24 segments in total;

For 32 bits instruction DPLSA. The parameters’ address is a section starts from Dn or FDn.

operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Word


Bit



S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● K

In the above example: D0,D1 set the first segment pulse’s highest frequency、D2,D3 set the first segment’s absolute position，D4,D5 set the second segment pulse’s highest frequency、D6,D7 set the second segment’s absolute position ， … … if the set value in Dn,Dn+1,Dn+2,Dn+3 is 0, this represents the end of segment, we can set 24 segments in total;


Pulse can be output at only Y0 or Y1, XC5 series is Y0~Y3, 3 axis is Y0~Y2, 10 axis is Y0~Y11.

Frequency range: 0~32767Hz (16 bits instruction), 0~200KHz (32 bits instruction) Pulse number range: K0~K32,767 (16 bits instruction), K0~K2,147,483,647 (32 bits

instruction) Confirm the value in current position registers (D8171, D8170[Y0]/ D8174,

D8173[Y1] ……) The Y port to output the pulse direction can be set freely;

Note: when PLSA and DPLSA has several segments, the direction of these segments must be the same.

Output 6 segments of pulse through instruction DPLSA. The pulse terminal is Y0, direction terminal is Y2.

Example

Name Frequency (Hz) Absolution position

Segment 1 1000 2000 Segment 2 200 3000 Segment 3 3000 9000 Segment 4 800 10600 Segment 5 100 11400 Segment 6 1200 14400 Acceleration/deceleration time 100ms

Use 32 bits instruction DPLSA: Name Frequency


Absolution position

Absolution position (Dword)

Segment 1 1000 D1、D0 2000 D3、D2 Segment 2 200 D5、D4 3000 D7、D6 Segment 3 3000 D9、D8 9000 D11、D10 Segment 4 800 D13、D12 10600 D15、D14 Segment 5 100 D17、D16 11400 D19、D18 Segment 6 1200 D21、D20 14400 D23、D22 Acceleration/deceleration time

100ms D51、D0

Note: the 4 registers after segment 6 must be 0. (D27、D26、D25、D24). It means the pulse output

end. For 16 bits instruction PLSA, the 2 registers after segment 6 must be 0.

F Hz

3000

1200

1000

800

200100

0 2000 3000 9000 10600 11400 14400

Program:

6-2-11．Relative position multi-section pulse control [PTO] 1、Summary

Produce relative position multi-section pulse as setting parameters. Relative position multi-section pulse control [PTO] 16 bits - 32 bits PTO Execution condition

Edge triggering Suitable models

XC3、XC5、XCM、XCC

Hardware V3.3 and higher Software V3.3 and higher 2、Operand

Operands Function Type S1 Soft element head address of output pulse

parameters 32 bits, BIN

S2 External interruption input port no. Bit

D1 Pulse output port no. Bit D2 Pulse output direction port no. Bit

3、Suitable soft element PTO instruction has two control modes. Mode1: PTO without external interruption


《no direction》《with direction》

Parameters distribution: (the parameters are 32 bits 2 bytes): S1 ：section quantity N, range 1~255 S1+2 ：reserved S1+4 ：pulse direction, 0 is positive direction; 1 is negative direction Among each section, only one section pulse quantity can be 0. S1+6 ：pulse falling slope, which is decreasing frequency per second. 0 means urgent stop.

S1+8 ：start frequency of section 1 S1+10：end frequency of section 1 S1+12：pulse quantity of section 1

S1+14：start frequency of section 2

Oper-

and

System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S2 ●

D1 ●

D2 ●

Word

Description

Bit

Oper-

and

System Const

-ant

Module


S1 ● ● ●



Y1

D2·

S1+16：end frequency of section 2 S1+18：pulse quantity of section 2

S1+20：start frequency of section 3 S1+22：end frequency of section 3 S1+24：pulse quantity of section 3

…… and so on, user can set section N parameters

The parameters address starts from Dn or FDn

In the above example:（D1,D0） is pulse section quantity;（D5,D4）is pulse direction; （D7,D6）is pulse falling frequency;（D9,D8）is start frequency of section 1;（D11,D10）is end frequency of section 1; (D13,D12) is the pulse quantity of section 1. The max section quantity can be 255.

Pulse output: Y0, Y1; the pulse output terminal is different for each model. If pulse quantity of section m is 0, this means the pulse quantity is unlimited. If pulse quantity of section m is 0, the start frequency must be equal to the end frequency;

otherwise this section will not be executed. If pulse quantity is not 0, the pulse direction is decided by the positive/negative of pulse. If

the pulse quantity is 0, the pulse direction is set through S1+4. S1+6 is the slow stop slope when executing PSTOP (refer to PSTOP instruction). Pulse parameters occupy the register size: [(N*3+4)+(N*3+4)+(N*4+5)]*2. The instruction is executed at the rising edge; if the signal is normally close, the instruction

will be executed repeatedly.

Section Start frequency (Hz)

End frequency (Hz)

Relative pulse quantity

1 1000 1500 3000 2 1500 3200 3200

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Example Continuous output 9 sections of pulses, the pulse output terminal is Y0, pulse direction terminal is Y2, the start frequency and end frequency please see the following table:

3 3200 6000 2000 4 6000 8000 10000 5 8000 8000 18000 6 8000 6000 10000 7 6000 3200 2000 8 3200 1500 3200 9 1500 1000 3000

�

Ladder chart:

Set the parameters:

Set the parameters through PTO config . Please find it in XCPpro software.

Note:

(1) PTO parameters will occupy the registers of D4000~D4205, please don’t use these registers for other purpose.

(2) Click “Write to PLC” / OK. Then click stop , run .

Mode2: PTO with external interruption


Parameter distribution (the parameter is 32 bits, 2 bytes): S1 ：section quantity N, range 1~255 S1+2 ：reserved S1+4 ：pulse direction (the section of 0 pulses), 0 is positive direction, 1 is negative direction S1+6 ：pulse falling slope, decreasing frequency per second, 0 is urgent stop

S1+8 ：start frequency of section 1 S1+10：end frequency of section 1 S1+12：pulse quantity of section 1



…… And so on, user can set the parameters of section N

If user has not set the 0 pulse section, the instruction will not be executed. If the external signal is produced in zero pulse section, it will switch to the next section (if

there is no next section, stop the pulse output). If the external signal is produced in non-zero pulse section, it will run the rest pulses with the

set slope (S1+6 parameter); if the rest pulses is larger than the pulse quantity of frequency falling section, it will run a smooth section and then the falling section.

S1+6 is the urgent stop slope when running PSTOP instruction. Cannot support absolute position instruction, cannot support instruction with direction.

Description

PTO D0 X1M0 S1· D1·

Y0

S2·

1 2 6 7 8

Extenal signal

The instruction will be executed at the rising edge; if it is normally close signal, the instruction will be executed repeatedly.

The instruction execution in different conditions:

The external interruption signal is produced in zero pulse section.

The instruction will switch to the next section when encountering the external interruption signal, Ss=S3+S4+S5. S3 is section 3 pulse quantity. S4 is section 4 pulse quantity. S5 is section 5 pulse quantity.

External interruption signal is produced in non-zero pulse section, rest pulses Ss is larger than

falling pulses Sn.

When encountering the external interruption signal, it runs the smooth section with the current frequency Sm=Ss-Sn, then the falling section Sn.

Ss is pulses of rest section. Sn is pulses of frequency falling section when encountering external interruption signal. Sm is pulses of smooth section when encountering the external interruption signal. S6 is the pulses of section 6 S7 is the pulses of section 7 S8 is the pulses of section 8

The external interruption signal is produced in the non-zero pulse section. The rest pulses Ss

is smaller than falling section pulses Sn.

1 4 5

External signal

S3

4 6 7 8

External signal

Slope KS

nm

When encountering the external interruption signal, it runs the falling section with the slope K. When Ss= S6+S7, it stops outputting the pulses. Ss is the pulses of rest section. S6 is the pulses of section 6. S7 is the pulses of section 7. Sn is the pulses of falling section when encountering the external interruption signal.

S1+6=0, the pulse will stop after running the smooth section. Sm=S6+S7+S8 The external interruption signal is produced in non-zero pulse section, rest pulses Ss is

smaller than falling section pulses Sn. If encountering the external interruption signal, it runs the falling pulses with slope K, when

Ss= S6+S7, it stop outputting the pulses. Ss is the rest section pulses. S6 is the pulses of section 6. S7 is the pulses of section 7. Sn is the falling section pulses when encountering the external interruption signal.

3

6 7

External signal

Slope K

S

n

6-2-12．Absolute position multi-section pulse control [PTOA]

1、Summary

Section to produce pulse instructions of absolute position according to specified parameters Absolute position multi-section pulse control [PTOA] 16 bits Instruction


PTOA

Execution condition

Edge triggering Suitable Models



V3.3 and higher version Software requirement

V3.3 and higher version

2、Operands

Operands Function Type S1 Specify the soft component’s start ID of the output

pulse parameters 32bits，BIN

D1 Specify the pulse output port Bit D2 Specify the pulse output direction port Bit

3、Suitable soft components

3

6 7

External signal

Slope K

S

n

Mode: PTOA (Fixed pulse quantity)

《32 bits instruction form》《Without direction》

《With direction》

The parameters address and functions are shown as below (the parameter is 32 bits, two bytes): S1 ：Total section N, range is 1~255 S1+2 ：reserved S1+4 ：The direction(0 is positive,1 is negative) of unlimited pulse section (zero pulse

section) S1+6 ： Pulse descending slope, decreasing frequency per second, 0 means urgent stop

S1+8 ： Start pulse frequency of section 1 S1+10: End pulse frequency of section 1 S1+12：Absolute pulse position of section 1

S1+14：Start pulse frequency of section 2 S1+16：End pulse frequency of section 2 S1+18：Absolute pulse position of section 2

S1+20：Start pulse frequency of section 3 S1+22：End pulse frequency of section 3 S1+24：Absolute pulse position of section 3

……

operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Word

Bit

operands System constant module


S1 ● ● ● ●

PTOA D0 Y0M0

S1· D1·

PTOA D0 Y0M0 S1· D1·

Y1

D2·

Description

The pulse parameters address of section N can be known by this discipline

The pulse direction of section 1 is decided by current pulse quantity and cumulative pulse quantity, other section directions are decided by current pulse quantity and last section pulse quantity;

Occupied registers size: [(N*3+4)+(N*3+4)+(N*4+5)]*2； The toggle condition to execute the pulse is rising edge, if the signal is closed signal the pulse

will execute repeatedly.

Name Start Frequency(Hz) End Frequency(Hz) Absolute pulse quantity of each section Section 1 1000 1500 3000 Section 2 1500 3200 6200 Section 3 3200 6000 8200 Section 4 6000 8000 18200 Section 5 8000 8000 36200 Section 6 8000 6000 46200 Section 7 6000 3200 48200 Section 8 3200 1500 51400 Section 9 1500 1000 54400

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Example The pulse output terminal is Y0, direction terminal is Y2; The start, end frequency, pulse absolute position is shown in below table:

Ladder chart:

Set the parameters:

Fast configure the parameters through the PTO config function in XCPpro software:

Caution: because the pulse instruction occupy the register address D4000~D5205, these register addresses can’t be used for other purpose.

6-2-13．Pulse Stop [PSTOP] 1、Summary

Pulse stop instruction, execute with PTO instruction. Pulse Stop [PSTOP] 16 bits Instruction


PSTOP

Execution condition



Hardware requireme

V3.3 and higher version Software requirement

V3.3 and higher version

nt 2、Operands

Operands Function Type S1 Specify pulse stop output port bit S2 Specify pulse stop mode data decimal，K


This instruction is used to stop PTO pulse instruction. S2：Stop mode (urgent stop; slow stop).

S2=K1, M0 is ON, pulses urgent stop. S2=K0, M0 is ON, pulses slow stop with the slope of PTO instruction parameter S1+6 (If S1+6=0, it is urgent stop mode).

Frequency

0

M0

K

T

When M0 is ON, the solid line is urgent stop (K1), dotted line is slow stop.

operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S1 ●

Word

Description

Bit

Operands System constant module


S2 ●

PSTOP Y0 K1M0

S1· S2·

6-2-14． Variable frequency single-section pulse [PTF]

1、Summary To produce the variable frequency pulses as set parameters:

Variable frequency single section pulse output [PTF] 16 bits Instruction


PTF

Execution condition




V3.3 and higher vision Software requirement

V3.3 and higher vision

2、Operands

Operands Function Type S1 Specify the soft component start ID of the pulse

parameters 32 bits，BIN

D1 Specify the pulse output port Bit D2 Specify the pulse output direction port Bit



《Without directions》《With directions》

operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ●

D2 ●

Word

Description

Bit

operands System constant module


S1 ● ● ● ●

PTF D0 Y0M0

S1· D1·

PTF D0 Y0M0

S1· D1·

Y1

D2·

The parameters are shown as below (the parameters is 32 bits, two bytes): S1 ：Pulse frequency S1+2 : Rising and falling frequency of pulse, which is increasing/decreasing frequency per

second Pulse quantity in current section and cumulative pulses are not refreshed. Current pulse frequency is a target for every scanning period

（A）The increasing pulses are 0 in unit time(S1+2 = 0)

Pulse frequency will change as the slope K:

（B） The increase frequency quantity in unit time is not 0(he parameter of S1+2 is not 0)

1）The pulse is in a smooth section when user set a new frequency, then the frequency will change to setting frequency through with the setting slope, please see the following diagram:

2）The pulse is in non-smooth section when user set a new frequency, then the frequency

will change to setting frequency with setting slope (current setting frequency>last setting frequency, current setting frequency will be the target), please see the following diagram:

V0

V1

V2

V3

Slope K

V0Slope K

V1

Slope K

Target frequency V0

V0

V1

Target frequency V1 Target frequency 0

Before the frequency reaches V0, user set the new target frequency V1(V1>V0), then the

frequency will turn to V1 according to the slope.

3）The pulse is in non-smooth section, when user set the new frequency, then change to setting frequency with the setting slope (Current setting frequency<last setting frequency, current setting frequency<current frequency), please see the following diagram:

Before the frequency reaches V0, user set the new target frequency V1(V1<V0,V1<current frequency), it will go to the decreasing section until V1, the slope is the same to the increasing section.

Target frequency V0

V2Target frequency V1 Target frequency 0

V0

V1

Target frequency V2

Target frequency V0

V2

Target frequency V1 Target frequency 0

V0

V1

Target frequency V2

6-3．Output Wiring

Y0COM0

Y1COM1

Y2COM2

Below is the graph to show the output terminals and stepping driver wiring:

Y0PU

PUY1

6-4．Notes

1、Concept of Step Frequency

PLC side Stepping driver side

Output port Y0: Pulse output port 0 (single phase) Output port Y1: Pulse output port 1 (single phase)

频率的跳变

2、frequency jump in segment pulse output

When outputting the segmented pulse, if the current segment’s pulse has been set out, while meantime it doesn’t reach the highest frequency, then from the current segment to the next pulse output segment, pulse jump appears, see graph above;

To avoid frequency jump, please set suitable acceleration/deceleration time. 3、dual pulse output is invalid

D0PLSR D100 Y0M0

D200PLSR D1000 Y0M1

In the following cases, dual pulse output is invalid:

（1）in main program

In one main program, users can’t write two or more pulse output instructions with one output port Y;

The below sample is wrong;

During ACC/DEC, each step time is 5ms, this time is fixed and not changeable. The minimum step frequency (each step’s rising/falling time) is 10Hz. If the frequency is

lower than 10Hz, calculate as 10Hz; the maximum step frequency is 15Hz. If the frequency is larger than 15Hz, calculate as 15Hz;

In case of frequency larger than 200Hz, please make sure each segment’s pulse number no less than 10, if the set value is less than 10, send as 200Hz;

（2）in STL

（3）in subprogram

（4）one in main program, another in STL

（5）one in main program, another in subprogram

The correct programming method when it needs to write more than one pulse output instructions:

Method 1: use STL, each STL only write one pulse output instruction

Example:

Note: the two STL cannot work at the same time! (M2 and M3 cannot be ON at the same time)

Method2: if the same instruction needs to work in many places of the program, user can write one instruction in the main program, and put its parameter registers in STL.

M0

( S )S0

STL S0

DMOV K1000 D4000S0

M8170 M1

( R )

S1( S )

STLE

STL S1

0

4

6

27

31

39

42

65

68

DMOV K3000 D4002

FMOV K0 D4004 K8

DMOV K100 D4030

( )TO K1

T0

( S )M1

M1

DMOV K1000 D4000S1

DMOV K-3000 D4002

FMOV K0 D4004 K8

DMOV K100 D4030

TO K1( )

M8170 M1( R )

S1( R )

STLE

63

67

( S )M1

M1

T0

DPLSR D4000 D4030 Y0 Y2M1

Method3: use sequence block. BLOCK can support multi-instruction sequential working. Please refer to chapter 10.

6-5．Sample Programs

Program:

Note: register D0, D1, D2, D3 set the frequency and pulse quantity of segment 1 and 2. D30 set the acceleration/deceleration time, reset register D4, D5.

FRQM K20 D0 K1 X003X000

PLSF D0 Y0

E.g.2: follow function In this sample, the pulse frequency from Y0 equals with the frequency tested from X003. If the frequency tested from X003 changes, the pulse frequency from Y0 changes;

E.g.1: Stop at certain length With instruction [PLSR] and [PLSNEXT], make “stop at certain length” function;

M0

M1

M8170

Take the sample program as the example, set two segments pulse output in D0、D1 and D2，D3, with the same frequency value; In second segment pulse output, set pulse number D3 as the output pulse number after receive M1 signal. This will realize “stop at certain length” function. See graph by the left side;

6-6．Relative coils and registers of pulse output Some flags of pulse output are listed below:

ID Pulse ID Function specification M8170 PULSE_1 “sending pulse” flag Being ON when sending the pulse,

M8171 overflow flag of “32 bits pulse sending”

When overflow, Flag is on

M8172 Direction flag 1 is positive direction, the correspond direction port is on

M8173 PULSE_2 “sending pulse” flag Being ON when sending the pulse,












M8210 PULSE_1 Pulse alarm flag (frequency change suddenly) 1 is alarm, 0 is correct

M8211 Neglect the alarm or not When flag is 1, stop sending alarm









Some special registers of pulse output are listed below:

ID Pulse ID Function Specification

D8170 PULSE_1 The low 16 bits of accumulated pulse number

D8171 The high 16 bits of accumulated pulse number

D8172 The current segment (means segment n)



D8175 The current segment ( means segment n )







D8190 PULSE_1 The low 16 bits of the current accumulated current pulse number

D8191 The high 16 bits of the current accumulated current pulse number




Only XC5-32RT-E (4PLS) model has




D8210 PULSE_1 The error pulse segment’s position D8212 PULSE_2 The error pulse segment’s position D8214 PULSE_3 The error pulse segment’s position D8216 PULSE_4 The error pulse segment’s position

Absolute position/relative position/back to origin;

Note: for frequency rising time of absolution/relative positioning instruction, the register setting value should meet the following formula:

For example: instruction DRVA K300080 K3000 Y0 Y4, rising time is 100ms. Then register D8230 (Dword) = 3=[100(ms)×3000(Hz)] ÷100K(Hz).

D8218 PULSE_5 The error pulse segment’s position

ID Pulse Function Description

D8230 PULSE_1

Rising time of the absolute/relation position instruction (Y0)

D8231 Falling time of the origin return instruction (Y0)

D8232

PULSE_2



D8234 PULSE_3



D8236 PULSE_4



D8238 PULSE_5

Rising time of the absolute/relation position instruction

D8239 Falling time of the origin return instruction

Register (D8230, D8232……) = Rising time(ms)×max frequency

100K

7 Communication Function

This chapter mainly includes: basic concept of communication, Modbus communication, free communication and CAN-bus communication;

7-1．Summary

7-2．Modbus Communication

7-3．Free Communication

7-4．CAN Communication

Relative Instructions:

Mnemonic Function Circuit and Soft Components Chapter

MODBUS Communication

COLR Coil Read

7-2-3

INPR Input coil read INPR S1 S2 S3 D1 D2

7-2-3

COLW Single coil write COLW D1 D2 S1 S2

7-2-3

MCLW Multi-coil write MCLW D1 D2 D3 S1 S2

7-2-3

REGR Register read REGR S1 S2 S3 D1 D2

7-2-3

INRR Input register read INRR S1 S2 S3 D1 D2

7-2-3

REGW Single register write REGW D1 D2 S1 S2

7-2-3

MRGW Multi-register write MRGW D1 D2 D3 S1 S2

7-2-3

Free Communication

SEND Send data SEND S1 S2 n

7-3-2

RCV Receive data RCV S1 S2 n

7-3-2

CAN-bus Communication

CCOLR Read coil

7-4-4

CCOLW Write coil

7-4-4

CREGR Read register CREGR S1 S2 S3 D

7-4-4

CREGW Write register CREGW D1 D2 D3 S

7-4-4

7-1．Summary

XC2-PLC, XC3-PLC, XC5-PLC main units can fulfill your requirement on communication and network. They not only support simple network (Modbus protocol、free communication protocol), but also support those complicate network. XC2-PLC, XC3-PLC, XC5-PLC offer communication access, with which you can communicate with the devices (such as printer, instruments etc.) that have their own communication protocol.

XC2-PLC, XC3-PLC, XC5-PLC all support Modbus protocol 、 free protocol these communication function, XC5-PLC also have CANbus function.

7-1-1．COM port There are 2 COM ports (Port1、Port2) on XC3 series PLC basic units, while there are 3 COM ports on XC5 series PLC main units. Besides the same COM ports (COM1、COM2), they have also CAN COM port. COM 1 (Port1) is the programming port, it can be used to download the program and connect with the other devices. The parameters (baud rate, data bit etc.) of this COM port are fixed, can’t be re-set. Note: PLC hardware version less than v3.1: port 1 parameters cannot be changed, otherwise port 1 cannot connect to PC PLC hardware version higher than v3.2: port 1 parameters cannot be changed. But user can stop the PLC when start, then initialize the PLC. COM 2 (Port2) is communication port, it can be used to download program and connect with other devices. The parameters (baud rate, data bit etc.) of this COM port can be changed via software. Via BD cards, XC series PLC can expand port 3. These COM ports can be RS232 and RS485.

COM9COM8

Y

X

X0X1COM

COM X2X3

X4X5

X6X7

X10X11

X12X13

X14X15

X16X17

X20X21

X22X23

X24X25

X26X27

X30X37

X40X36X35

X34X33

X32X31 X41

X42X43

Y27Y26

Y25Y24

Y15 Y17COM6 Y21

Y20COM7Y23

Y22Y16Y13 Y14

COM5Y11

Y12Y7 Y10Y6COM4

Y4Y5COM3

Y3Y2Y1COM2

Y0COM1COM0

CAN+ CAN-A B

0V24V

PORT2PORT1XC3-60R-E

ERR

RUNPWR

0 1 32 6 754

4 5 762 310

COM Port

Port 1

Port 2 (232)

Port 3

Port 2 (485)

1. RS232 Port Note: 1. Port 1 support RS232. 2. Port 2 support RS232, RS485. But RS232 and RS485 cannot be used at the same time. 3. Port 3 support RS232, RS485. But RS232 and RS485 cannot be used at the same time. (need to expand XC-COM-BD).

2. RS485 port: About RS485 port, A is “+” signal、B is “-“ signal. The A, B terminals (RS485) on XC series PLC is the same port to Port 2. This two ports cannot be used at the same time. (the same to Port 3). Please use twisted pair cable for RS485. (see below diagram). But shielded twisted pair cable is better and the single-ended connect to the ground.

3. CAN port: CAN port can be applied to CANBUS communication. The pin terminals are “CAN+”, “CAN-“ For the detailed CAN communication functions, please refer to chapter 7-4 CAN bus function.

COM1 Pin Definition:

3 4 5

1 2

6 87

Mini Din 8 pin female

2：PRG 4：RxD 5：TxD 6：VCC 8：GND

COM2 Pin Definition:

3 4 5

1 2

6 87

Mini Din 8 pin female

4：RxD 5：TxD 8：GND

Send Receive

Receive Send

Interference signal

7-1-2．Communication Parameters Station Modbus Station number: 1~254、255 (FF) is free format communication Baud Rate 300bps~115.2Kbps Data Bit 8 bits data、7 bits data Stop Bit 2 stop bits、1 stop bit Parity Even、Odd、No check

The default parameters of COM 1: Station number is 1、baud rate is 19200bps、8 data bit、1 stop bit、Even parity

COM 1

Number Function Description

FD8210 Communication mode 255 is free format， 1~254 bit is Modbus station number

FD8211 Communication format Baud rate, data bit, stop bit, parity

FD8212 ASC timeout judgment time Unit: ms，if set to be 0, it means no timeout waiting

FD8213 Reply timeout judgment time Unit: ms，if set to be 0, it means no timeout waiting

FD8214 Start symbol High 8 bits invalid FD8215 End symbol High 8 bits invalid

FD8216 Free format setting 8/16 bits cushion, with/without start bit, with/without stop bit

COM 2






Parameters Setting

Set the parameters with the COM ports on XC series PLC;

Communication Parameters

Baud rate: Please see below table

0：8bits data 1：7bits data

0：2 stop bits 2：1stop bit

0：No parity 1：Odd parity 2：Even parity


COM 3







※1: The PLC will be Off line after changing the communication parameters, use “stop when reboot” function to

keep PLC online; ※2: After modifying the data with special FLASH data registers, the new data will get into effect after reboot;

FD8211 (COM1)/FD8221 (COM2)/FD8231 (COM3)

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Set the communication parameters:

0: 8 bits communication 1: 16 bits communication

0: without start symbol 1: with start symbol

0: without end symbol 1: with end symbol

Reserved

bit0~bit3 baud rate: Baud rate Suitable type Baud rate Suitable type 0：300bps XC1 0：768Kbps - XC2、XCM、XCC 1：600bps XC1 1：600bps XC3、XC5 XC2、XCM、XCC 2：1200 bps XC1 2：1200 bps XC3、XC5 XC2、XCM、XCC 3：2400 bps XC1 3：2400 bps XC3、XC5 XC2、XCM、XCC 4：4800 bps XC1 4：4800 bps XC3、XC5 XC2、XCM、XCC 5：9600 bps XC1 5：9600 bps XC3、XC5 XC2、XCM、XCC 6：19.2K bps XC1 6：19.2Kbps XC3、XC5 XC2、XCM、XCC 7：38.4K bps XC1 7：38.4Kbps XC3、XC5 XC2、XCM、XCC 8：57.6K bps XC1 8：57.6Kbps XC3、XC5 - 9：115.2K bps XC1 9：115.2Kbps XC3、XC5 - - - A：192Kbps XC3、XC5 XC2、XCM、XCC - - B：256Kbps - XC2、XCM、XCC - - C：288Kbps XC3、XC5 - - - D：384Kbps XC3、XC5 XC2、XCM、XCC - - E：512Kbps - XC2、XCM、XCC - - F：576Kbps XC3、XC5 - FD8216 (COM1)/FD8226 (COM2)/FD8236 (COM3)

Note: user doesn’t have to calculate the FD value to set the communication parameter. Please set the parameters in XCPpro software.

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

After changing the parameters, please restart the PLC to make it effective.

7-2．MODBUS Communication

7-2-1．Function XC series PLC support both Modbus master and Modbus slave. Master mode: When PLC is set to be master, PLC sends request to other slave devices via Modbus

instructions, other devices response the master. For example, Xinje PLC can control the inverter through Modbus.

Slave mode: when PLC is set to be slave, it can only response with other master devices. Master and slave: in RS485 network, there are one maser and several slaves at one time (see

below diagram). The master station can read and write any slave stations. Two slave stations cannot communicate with each other. Master station communicates with slave station through Modbus instructions. Slave station has no program but only response the master station. (wiring: connect all the RS485 +, connect all the RS485-)

In RS232 network, there is only one master and one slave.

There is dotted line in the diagram. It means any PLC can be master station when all the PLC in the network don’t send data. But more than one PLC will send data at one time, the communication will fail. It is not recommended to use. Note: For XC series PLC, RS232 only support half-duplex.

Slave Master

Master

Slave 1

Slave 2

Slave 3

7-2-2．Address For the soft component’s number in PLC which corresponds with Modbus address number, please see the following table:

Coil address: (Modbus ID prefix is “0x”） Bit ID ModbusID

( decimal K)

Modbus ID

(Hex. H)

M0~M7999 0~7999 0~1F3F X0~X1037 16384~16927 4000~421F Y0~Y1037 18432~18975 4800~4A1F S0~S1023 20480~21503 5000~53FF M8000~M8511 24576~25087 6000~61FF T0~T618 25600~26218 6400~666A C0~C634 27648~28282 6C00~6E7A

Register address: (Modbus ID prefix is “4x”）

Word ID ModbusID

( decimal K)

Modbus ID

(Hex. H)

D0~D7999 0~7999 0~1F3F TD0~TD618 12288~12906 3000~326A CD0~CD634 14336~14970 3800~3A7A D8000~D8511 16384~16895 4000~41FF FD0~FD5000 18432~23432 4800~5B88 FD8000~FD8511 26624~27135 6800~69FF

The address is used when PLC uses Modbus-RTU protocol. The host machine is PLC,

HMI or SCADA. If the host machine is PLC, please write the program as Modbus-RTU protocol. If the

host machine is HMI or SCADA, there are two conditions. Condition one: with Xinje driver such as Xinje HMI. Please write the program with PLC soft components (Y0, M0, D0…). Condition two: without Xinje driver. Please choose Modbus-RTU protocol, the address is as the above table.

※1: Bit soft components X, Y are in Octal form, others are in decimal form. For example: X10 modbus address is not K16394 but K16392. Y100 modbus address is K18496. Note: octal has no Y8/Y9 and Y80/Y90.

7-2-3 Modbus communication format Modbus communication data format 1. RTU mode:

START No signal input ≧ 10ms Address Communication address: 8-bit binary Function Function code: 8-bit binary

DATA（n - 1） Data contents:

N*8-bit data, N<=8, max 8 bytes ……………

DATA 0 CRC CHK Low CRC check code

CRC CHK High 16-bit CRC check code is built up by 2 8-bit

binary END No signal input ≧ 10ms

2. Modbus address

00H: all the Xinje XC series PLC broadcast ---- slave stations don’t response. 01H: communicate with address 01H PLC 0FH: communicate with address 0FH PLC 10H: communicate with address 10H PLC……….the max address is FEH (254)

3. Function and DATA:

Function code Function Modbus instruction 01H Read coil COLR 02H Read input coil INRR 03H Read register REGR 04H Read input register INRR 05H Write coil COLW 06H Write register REGW 10H Write multi-register MRGW 0FH Write multi-coil MCLW

Now we use function code 06H to introduce the data format. For example: write data to register D2 (address H0002) RTU mode:

Asking format Response format Address 01H Address 01H Function code 06H Function code 06H Register address 00H Register address 00H

02H 02H Data contents 13H Data contents 13H

88H 88H CRC CHECK Low 25H CRC CHECK Low 25H

CRC CHECK High 5CH CRC CHECK High 5CH Explanation: 1. Address is PLC station no. 2. Function code is Modbus-RTU protocol read/write code. 3. Register address is the PLC modbus address, please see chapter 7-2-2. 4. Data contents is the value in D2. 5. CRC CHECK Low / CRC CHECK High is low bit and high bit of CRC check value If 2 piece of XINJE XC series PLC communicate with each other, write K5000 to D2.

M0 is trigger condition. If the communication is failure, the instruction will try twice again. If the third time communication is failure, the communication ends. The relationship between REGW and Modbus RTU protocol (other instructions are the same)

REGW Function code 06H K1 Station no. H0002 Modbus address K5000 Data contents 1388H K2 PLC serial port

The complete communication data are : 01H 06H 00H 02H 13H 88H (system take

the CRC checking automatically)

If monitor the serial port data by serial port debugging tool, the data are: 01 06 00 02 13 88 25 5C Note: the instruction doesn’t distinguish decimal, hex, binary, hex, octal, etc. For example,

B10000, K16 and H10 are the same value, so the following instructions are the same. REGW K1 B111110100 D1 K2

REGW K1 K500 D1 K2 REGW K1 H1F4 D1 K2

7-2-4．Communication Instructions Modbus instructions include coil read/write, register read/write; below, we describe these instructions in details: The operand definition in the instruction:

1. Remote communication station and serial port number

For example, one PLC connects 3 inverters. PLC needs to write and read the parameters of inverter. The inverter station no. is 1, 2, 3. So the remote communication station no. is 1, 2, 3.

2. Remote register/coil quantity

For example, PLC read inverter frequency (H2103), output current (H2104) and bus voltage (H2105). So the remote register first address is H2103, quantity is K3 (3 registers).

3. Local coil/register address

For example, local coil is M0, write the M0 state to remote coil.

Local register is D0, write the D0 value to remote register.

Coil Read [COLR] 1、Instruction Summary

Read the specified station’s specified coil status to the local PLC; Coil read [COLR] 16 bits instruction

COLR 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Condition



Hardware Requirement

- Software Requirement

-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the remote communication station 16bits, BIN S2 Specify the remote coil first address 16bits, BIN S3 Specify the coil quantity 16bits, BIN D1 Specify the local coil first address bit D2 Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN


COLR K1 K500 K3 M1X0

K2

S1· S2· S3· D1· D2·

Read coil instruction, Modbus function code is 01H Serial Port: K1~K3 Operand S3: K1~K984, the max coil quantity is 984 Input Coil Read [INPR] 1、Instruction

Read the specified station’s specified input coils into local coils: Input coil read [INPR] 16 bits instruction

INPR 32 bits instruction -

Execution Condition

Normally ON/OFF、rising edge Suitable Models XC2, XC3, XC5, XCM, XCC



-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the remote communication station 16bits, BIN S2 Specify the remote coil first address 16bits, BIN S3 Specify the coil quantity 16bits, BIN D1 Specify the local coil first address bit D2 Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN

Operands Operands

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Function

Bit



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 K


INPR K1 K500 K3 M1X0

K2

S1· S2· S3· D1· D2·

Instruction to read the input coil, Modbus function code is 02H Serial port: K1~K3 Operand S3: K1~K984, the max coil quantity is 984 When X0 is ON, execute COLR or INPR instruction, set communication flag after execution

the instruction; when X0 is OFF, no operation. If error happens during communication, resend automatically. If the errors reach 3 times, set the communication error flag. The user can check the relative registers to judge the error

single coil write [COLW] 1、summary

Write the local coil status to the specified station’s specified coil; Single coil write [COLW] 16 bits instruction

COLW 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Condition




-

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Function

Bit



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 K

2、Operands Operands Function Type D1 Specify the remote communication station 16bits, BIN D2 Specify the remote coil first address 16bits, BIN S1 Specify the local coil first address bit S2 Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN


COLW K1 K500 M1X0

K2

D1· D2· S1· S2·

Write the single coil, Modbus function code is 05H Serial port: K1~K3 multi-coil write [MCLW] 1、Summary

Write the local multi-coil status into the specified station’s specified coil; Multi-coil write [MCLW] 16 bits instruction

MCLW 32 bits instruction -

Execution Condition




-

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Function

Bit



D1 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 K

2、Operands Operands Function Type D1 Specify the remote communication station 16bits, BIN D2 Specify the remote coil first address 16bits, BIN D3 Specify the coil quantity 16bits, BIN S1 Specify the local coil first address bit S2 Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN


MCLW K1 K500 K3 M1X0

K2

D1· S1· S2·D2· D3·

Instruction to write the multiply coils, Modbus function code is 0FH Serial port: K1~K3 Operand D3: the max coil quantity is 952 When X0 is ON, execute COLW or MCLW instruction, set communication flag after

execution the instruction; when X0 is OFF, no operation. If error happens during communication, resend automatically. If the errors reach 3 times, set the communication error flag. The user can check the relative registers to judge the error;

Register Read [REGR] 1、Summary

Read the specified station’s specified register to the local register; Register read [REGR] 16 bits instruction

REGR 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Condition

Normally ON/OFF、rising edge Suitable Models


Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S1 ● ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Function

Bit



D1 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

D3 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 K



-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the remote communication station 16bits, BIN S2 Specify the remote register first address 16bits, BIN S3 Specify the register quantity 16bits, BIN D1 Specify the local register first address bit D2 Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN


REGR K1 K500 K3 D1X0

K2

S1· S2· S3· D1· D2·

Instruction to read the REGISTERS, Modbus function code is 03H Serial port: K1~K3 Operand S3: the max register quantity is 61 Read Input Register [INRR] 1、Summary

Read the specified station’s specified input register to the local register Read Input Register [INRR] 16 bits instruction

INRR 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Condition



Word

Function



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D1 ●

D2 K



-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the remote communication station 16bits, BIN S2 Specify the remote register first address 16bits, BIN S3 Specify the register quantity 16bits, BIN D1 Specify the local register first address 16bits, BIN D2 Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN


INRR K1 K500 K3 D1X0

K2

S1· S2· S3· D1· D2·

Instruction to read the input registers, Modbus function code is 04H Serial port: K1~K3 Operand S3: the max input register quantity is 61 When X0 is ON, execute REGR or INRR instruction, set communication flag after execution

the instruction; when X0 is OFF, no operation. If error happens during communication, resend automatically. If the errors reach 4 times, set the communication error flag. The user can check the relative registers to judge the error;

Word

Function



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D1 ●

D2 K

Single register write [REGW] 1、summary

Instruction to write the local specified register into the specified station’s specified register; Single register write [REGW] 16 bits instruction

REGW 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Condition





-

2、Operands Operands Function Type D1 Specify the remote communication station 16bits, BIN D2 Specify the remote register first address 16bits, BIN S1 Specify the local register first address 16bits, BIN S2 Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN


REGW K1 K500 D1X0

K2

D1· S1· S2·D2·

Write the single register, Modbus function code is 06H Serial port: K1~K3

Word

Function



D1 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

S1 ●

S2 K

Multi-register write [MRGW] 1、Summary

Instruction to write the local specified register to the specified station’s specified register; Multi-register write [MRGW] 16 bits instruction

MRGW 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Condition

Normally ON/OFF 、 rising edge

Suitable Models




-

2、Operands Operands Function Type D1 Specify the remote communication station 16bits, BIN D2 Specify the remote register first address 16bits, BIN D3 Specify the register quantity 16bits, BIN S1 Specify the local register first address 16bits, BIN S2 Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN


MRGW K1 K500 K3 D1X0

K2

D1· D2· D3· S1· S2·

Instruction to write the multiply registers, Modbus function code is 10H Serial port: K1~K3 Operand D3: the max register quantity is 59 When X0 is ON, execute REGW or MRGW instruction, set communication flag after

execution the instruction; when X0 is OFF, no operation. If error happens during communication, resend automatically. If the errors reach 4 times, set the communication error flag. The user can check the relative registers to judge the error;

Word Operands System constant module


D1 ● ● ● ● ●

D2 ● ● ● ● ●

S1 ●

S2 K

Function

7-2-5．Application Wiring method There are two wiring methods: A、RS232 wiring method

Note:

(1) COM2 with *1 only show the RS232 pins. The RS485 pins are external terminal, which is not listed.

(2) XC series PLC RS232 cannot support full-duplex; it only can communicate in single direction.

(3) The communication distance of RS232 is not far (about 13m). RS485 can be further. B、485 wiring method

Connect all the terminal A, connect all the terminal B. A is RS485+, B is RS485-. Application: One XC series PLC connects 3 XC series PLCs. 3 slave PLCs follow the master’s action. Master PLC Y0 ON, slave Y0 ON. Master PLC Y0 OFF, slave PLC Y0 OFF. But the action of 3 slave PLCs cannot be very synchronous.

Method 1 program

( )SY0

Y0

S0PLC1

STL S0

M8138

M8137

S0COLW K1 H4800 Y0 K2

ZRST M8137 M8138

STLE

S1( )S

STL S1

M8138

M8137


ZRST M8137 M8138

STLE

S2( )S

STL S2

M8138

M8137


ZRST M8137 M8138

STLE

S2( )R

There are 3 STL in the program. Every STL is communication program of one slave. If one STL communication is successful, it jumps to the next STL. If not, it tries twice. If three times all fail, M8137 is ON and jump to the next STL. (This program uses serial port 2, if it is other serial port, please see appendix 1 for communication flag bit)

Method 2: use BLOCK to make the program

M8000 is always ON coil, the master will keep on writing the Y0 state to slave Y0. (Please refer to chapter 10 for BLOCK function). Method 3: use broadcast function

When master Y0 state changes, it broadcasts the state to all the slave. The synchronization is better than method 1 and 2.

7-3．FREE FORMAT COMMUNICATION

7-3-1．Communication mode Free format communication transfer data in the form of data block, each block can transfer 128 bytes at most. Free format communication mode Free format is free protocol communication. Now many devices support RS232 or RS485, but the communication protocol is different. For example, XINJE PLC is Modbus protocol, some temperature controllers use special protocol. If PLC needs to read temperature, it can send data according to the temperature controller protocol. Note: Port1, Port2 or Port3 can support free format communication, but free format usually needs

to change the serial port parameters. Port 1 parameter cannot be changed, so it is not recommended to use port 1.

In free format mode, FD8220 (port 2) or FD8230 (port 3) should set to be 255 (FF) Baud Rate: 300bps~115.2Kbps Data Format

Data Bit: 7bits, 8bits Parity: Odd, Even, No Check Stop bit: 1 bit, 2 bits

Start bit: 1 bit Stop bit: 1 bit User can set a start/stop bit, then PLC will automatically add this start/stop bit when sending data; remove this start/stop bit when receiving data. Start bit and stop bit can be seemed as header and frame end. If slave station has start and stop bit, they can be set in software or protocol.

Communication Format: 8 bits, 16 bits If choose 8 bits buffer format to communicate, in the communication process, the high bytes are invalid, PLC only use the low bytes to send and receive data. If choose 16 bits buffer format to communicate, when PLC is sending data, PLC will send low bytes before sending higher bytes

7-3-2．Suitable condition When can we use free format communication? In the last chapter, XINJE PLC communicates with temperature controller, the controller use own protocol. The protocol said that 4 characters should be sent when temperature read/write.

Character Meaning ： Data start R Read function T Temperature CR Enter, data end

PLC needs to send the ASCII code of above character to the controller.

The ASCII code of characters:

Character ASCII code ： 3A R 52 T 54 CR 0D

PLC cannot use Modbus protocol to communicate with the controller. The free format communication should be used. Please see the details in the following chapter.

7-3-3．Instruction form Send data [SEND] 1、Summary

Write the local specified data to the specified station’s specified ID; Send data [SEND] 16 bits instruction

SEND 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Condition


Suitable Models




-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the start address of local sending data 16bits, BIN S2 Specify the send character quantity or soft component

address 16bits, BIN

n Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN


SEND D10 D100 K2

S1· S2· nM0

Data send instruction, send data on the rising edge of M0; Serial port: K2~K3 When sending data, set “sending” flag M8132 (COM2) ON

Receive Date [RCV] 1、Summary

Write the specified station’s data to the local specified ID; Receive data [RCV] 16 bits instruction

RCV 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Condition


Suitable Models




-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify the start address of local receiving data 16bits, BIN



S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

n ● K

Function

S2 Specify the receive characters quantity or soft component address

16bits, BIN

n Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN


RCV D20 D200 K2

S1· S2· nM1

Data receive instruction, receive data on the rising edge of M0; Serial port: K2~K3 When receiving data, set “receiving” flag M8134(COM2) ON

※1: If you require PLC to receive but not send, or receive before send, you need to set the communication timeout

to 0ms



S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

n ●

Function

Release serial port [RCVST] 1、Summary Release the serial port Receive data [RCVST] 16 bits instruction

RCVST 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Condition


Suitable Models




-

2、Operands Operands Function Type n Specify the serial port no. 16bits, BIN


RCVST K2

nM0

RCVST instruction, it executes once at the rising edge of M0 Serial port: K2, K3 When releasing the serial port, set OFF M8134 (port 2 receiving sign bit), set ON M8135

(port 2 receive uncompleted sign bit) In free format communication mode, if there is no timeout or the timeout time is too long,

please use RCVST to release the serial port.



n K

Function

start

M0

M8135Receive

data

M8134

data

7-3-4．Free format communication application Here we use the example in chapter 7-3-2 (XINJE PLC and temperature controller) to explain the application. Operation:

1. Connect all the hardware wires. 2. Set the PLC serial port parameters as the controller communication parameters. (PLC

station no. is 255 in free format communication). Please restart the PLC after setting the parameters.

3. Make the program as the protocol in chapter 7-3-2. Read temperature send data: : R T CR : ---- start R ---- read T ---- temperature CR ---- enter, end

Two methods to making the program:

A. Normal method

M0

M0

MOV H3A D0

MOV H52 D1

MOV H54 D2

MOV H0D D3

SEND D0 K4 K2

RCV D10 K4 K2

D0:“：”asciicode

D1：“R”asciicode

D2：“T”asciicode

D1：“CR”asciicode

D0：“:”asciicode

M8132

D10：receive start0

0

0

0

0

0

If it needs to use STL, please refer to Modbus example program. Switch the STL by serial port communication sign bit.

B. use BLOCK to make the program Send data:

Receive data

Program:

M8000 is always ON coil; PLC will keep on reading the temperature.

When the PLC communicate with other device, please use serial port debug tool to monitor the data. Then make the free format protocol as the data format in the tool. This method can save time and easy to do. 7-4．CAN Bus Functions

7-4-1．Brief Introduction of CAN-bus XC5 series PLC support CANbus bus function. Below we will give some basic concept on CANbus;

CAN (Controller Area Network) belongs to industrial area bus category. Compared with common communication bus, CAN bus data communication has performance of outstanding dependability、real time ability and flexibility. CAN controller works under multi-master format. In the network, each node can send data to bus according to the bus visit priority. These characters enable each node in CAN bus network to have stronger data communication real time performance, and easy to construct redundant structure, improve the system’s dependability and flexibility.

In CANBUS network, any node can initiatively send message at any time to any other node, no master and no slave. Flexibility communication, it’s easy to compose multi-device backup system, distributing format monitor, control system. To fulfill different real time requirement, the

CAN-bus node Sub address 01




Sub address 00

120R 120R

nodes can be divided to be different priority level. With non-destroy bus adjudication technology, when two nodes send message to the network at the same time, the low level priority node initiatively stop data sending, while high level priority node can continue transferring data without any influence. So there is function of node to node, node to multi-node, bureau broadcasting sending/receiving data. Each frame’s valid byte number is 8, so the transfer time is short, the probability ratio is low.

7-4-2．External Wiring CAN-Bus Communication Port: CAN＋, CAN－ The wiring among each node of CAN bus is shown in the following graph; at the two ends, add 120 ohm middle-terminal resistors.

7-4-3．CAN Bus Network Form

There are two forms of CAN bus network: one is instructions communication format; the other is internal protocol communication format. These two forms can work at the same time Instructions communication format This format means, in the local PLC program, via CAN-bus instructions, execute bit or word reading/writing with the specified remote PLC. Internal protocol communication format This format means, via setting of special register, via configure table format, realize allude with each other among PLC’s certain soft component’s space. In this way, PLC can share the source in CAN-bus network.

7-4-4．CAN-bus Instructions

Read Coil [CCOLR] 1、Instruction Description

Function: Read the specified station’s specified coil status into the local specified coil. Read Coil [CCOLR] 16 bits instruction

CCOLR 32 bits instruction

-

120R 120R

00 01 02

CAN＋ CAN－ CAN＋ CAN－ CAN＋ CAN－

Execution Condition

Normally ON/OFF, rising edge activates

Suitable Models

XC5, XCC



-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 Specify remote communication station no. or soft component’s

address; 16bits, BIN

S2 Specify the remote coil’s start address or soft component’s address; 16bits, BIN S3 Specify the coil quantity or soft component’s address; 16bits, BIN D Specify the local receive coil’s start address bit


CCOLR K2 M20K20 K4

S1· S2· S3· D·X0

Execute CCOLR instruction when X0 changes from OFF to ON; read the four coils data of remote station 2, coil’s start address K20 to local coils M20～M23.

Write the Coil [CCOLW] 1、Summary

Write the local specified multi-coils status into the specified station’s specified coils; Write the coil [CCOLW] 16 bits instruction

CCOLW 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Normally ON/OFF 、 rising Suitable XC5, XCC



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

Function

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Condition edge Models Hardware Requirement


-

2、Operands Operands Function Type D1 Specify remote communication station no. or soft

component’s number; 16 bit, BIN

D2 Specify the remote coil’s start address or soft component’s number;

16 bit, BIN

D3 Specify the coil quantity or soft component’s number;

16 bit, BIN

S Specify the local receive coil’s start address bit


CCOLW K2 M20K20 K4X0

S·D1· D2· D3·

Execute CCOLW instruction when X0 changes from OFF to ON; write the local M20~M23

to the remote station no.2, coil’s start address K20, coil quantity is 4.

Read Register [CREGR] 1、Summary

Read the specified station’s specified register to the local specified register; Read register [CREGR] 16 bits instruction

CREGR 32 bits instruction -

Execution Condition

Normally ON/OFF、rising edge Suitable Models XC5, XCC



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ● ● ● ● ● ●

Bit

Function


- Software Requirement -

2、Operands Operands Function Type D1 Specify remote communication station no. or soft component’s

number; 16bits, BIN

D2 Specify the remote register’s start address or soft component’s number;

16bits, BIN

D3 Specify the register quantity or soft component’s number; 16bits, BIN S Specify the local receive coil’s start address 16bits, BIN


CREGR K2 D20K20 K4

S1· S2· S3· D·X0

Execute CREGR instruction when X0 changes from OFF to ON; read the remote station no.2, coil’s start address K20 (4 coils) to the local D20~D23

Write the Register [CREGW] 1、Summary

Write the specified local input register to the specified station’s specified register;

Write the register [CREGW] 16 bits instruction

CREGW 32 bits instruction

-

Execution Condition


XC5, XCC



-



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ●

Function

2、Operands Operands Function Type D1 Specify remote communication station no. or soft

component’s number; 16bits, BIN

D2 Specify the remote register’s start address or soft component’s number;

16bits, BIN

D3 Specify the register quantity or soft component’s number;

16bits, BIN

S Specify the local receive coil’s start address 16bits, BIN 3、Suitable soft components

CREGW K2 D20K20 K4X0

S·D1· D2· D3·

Execute CREGW instruction when X0 changes from OFF to ON; write the local D20~D23 to

the remote station no.2, coil’s start address K20.

7-4-5．Communication Form of Internal Protocol Open/close the internal protocol communication function

Set the value in register FD8350: 0: do not use CAN internal protocol communication; 1: use CAN internal protocol communication CAN internal protocol communication is default to open;

Set the communication parameters Method 1: direct setting

Step1. Add four configure items quantity separately: FD8360—read the bit items, FD8361—read the word items, FD8362—write the bit items, FD8363—write the word items



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

D ● ● ●

Function

Function

Step2. Set each configure item’s communication object, each item includes four parameter: remote station, remote object address, local object address, local quantity. The correspond registers are: FD8370~FD8373 represents item 1, FD8374~FD8377 represents item2 … …

FD9390~FD9393 represents item256; totally we can set 256 configure items; see the following table (communication setting).

Item Function Description FD8350 CAN communication mode 0 represents not use; 1 represents internal protocol FD8351 CAN baud rate See CAN baud rate setting table FD8352 Self CAN station no. For CAN protocol using (the default value is 1)

FD8354 Configured sending frequency

The set value’s unit is ms, represents “send every ms” if set to be 0, it means send every cycle, the default value is

5ms FD8360 Read bit number

- FD8361 Read word number FD8362 write bit number FD8363 write word number FD8370 Remote station address

The item 1 configuration FD8371 Remote object address FD8372 Local object address FD8373 Quantity …… …… …… FD9390 Remote node’s ID

The item 256 configuration FD9391 Remote node’s object ID FD9392 Local object’s ID FD9393 Number

M8240 CAN self check error flag

Set 1 if error; set 0 if correct

M8241 Error flag of CAN configure

Set 1 if error; set 0 if correct

Communication Setting

Status Flag

M8242 Automatically recover the control after CAN bus error

If set to be 1, then recover after error happens; If set to be 1, then CAN stops working after error happens; The default value is 1, this flag is not power-off retentive

FD8351 value

Baud Rate (BPS)

0 1K 1 2K 2 5K 3 10K 4 20K 5 40K 6 50K 7 80K 8 100K 9 150K

10 200K 11 250K 12 300K 13 400K 14 500K 15 600K 16 800K 17 1000K

Baud Rate Setting

D8240 CAN error information

0: no error 2: initialize error 30: bus error 31: error alarm 32: data overflow

D8241 The configure item no. which has error Show the first number of error configure item

D8242 Data package quantity sent every second -

D8243 Data package quantity received every second

-

D8244 CAN communication error count -

7-4-6．CAN Free Format Communication Please set FD8350 to 2 for CAN free format communication CAN Sending [CSEND] 1、Instructions Summary

Write the specified data from the unit to a specified address (data transfer in one unit) CAN Sending [CSEND] 16bits instruction

CSEND 32bits instruction

-

Executing Condition

Normally ON/OFF、Rising edge Suitable Models

XC5, XCC



-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 specify the ID of sending data package 16bits, BIN S2 specify the local sending data or soft component

locally 16bits, BIN

Register Status

S3 specify the byte number of sent data 16bits, BIN 3、Suitable soft components

CSEND K100 D0 K4

S1· S2·M0

S3·

Instruction for data sending, send data at every rising edge of M0 ID number of sending data package is 100, 4 bytes data, the first ID is in D0 8 bits data transfer: the transferred data is: D0L、D1L、D2L、D3L (D0L means the low byte

of D0) 16 bits data transfer: the transferred data is: D0L、D0H、D1L、D1H (D0H means the high byte

of D0)

CSEND D10 D0 D20M0

The ID of sending data package is specified by D10, the data number is specified by D20, the first ID is in D0;

8 bits data transfer: the transferred data is: D0L、D1L、D2L、D3L(D0L means the low byte of D0)

16 bits data transfer: the transferred data is: D0L、D0H、D1L、D1H (D0H means the high byte of D0)

Standard Frame: the valid bits of the data package ID number that is specified by D10 is the low 11 bits, the left bits are invalid;

The expansion frame: the valid bits of the data package ID number that is specified by D10 is the low 29 bits, the left bits are invalid;

The maximum data bits specified by D20 is 8, if exceeds 8, the instruction will send only 8 bits;

Word type



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ● ●

Functions and Actions

CAN Receive [CRECV] 1、Instructions Summary Write the specified data in one unit to a specified address in another unit (data transfers between different units) CAN Receive [CRECV] 16 bits instruction

CRECV 32 bits instruction

-

Executing Condition

Normally ON/OFF 、 Rising edge

Suitable Models

XC5, XCC



-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 specify the ID number to receive the data package 16bits, BIN S2 specify the local receiving soft component start ID 16bits, BIN S3 specify the byte quantity of received data 16bits, BIN S4 specify the soft component’s start ID number of ID

filter code 16bits, BIN


CRECV D0 D10 D20

S1· S2·M0

S3·

D30

S4·

The 32 bits memory combined by [D1, D0] (D0 is low byte, D1 is high byte) is used to stock ID number of the received data package. The received data length is stored in D20. The data content is stored in registers start from D10. D30 specifies the received ID filter code; if the received data doesn’t fit the filter codes, then it will keep the RECV status;

ID filter code: D30 specifies the start address of ID filter codes; the instruction specifies two groups of filter codes, occupy D30~D37;

Word Type



S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ●

S3 ● ● ● ●

S4 ●


Filter Code

Memory Description Example

The first group

D31, D30 D30 low bytes, D31 high bytes, they compose a 32 bits mask code

D30=0xFFFF, D31=0x0000, then the mask code is 0x0000FFFF D30=0x1234, D31=0x0000, then filter value is 0x00001234 If ID and 0x0000FFFF equals 0x00001234, the pass the first group of filter. If the ID pass any of two groups, the allow the reception

D33, D32 D32 low bytes, D33 high bytes, they compose a 32 bits filter value

The first group

D35, D34 D34 low bytes, D35 high bytes, they compose a 32 bits mask code

D37, D36 D36 low bytes, D37 high bytes, they compose a 32 bits filter value

Standard/ expansion frame: the setting of FD8358 has no effect to reception. If the data frame fulfills ID mask codes, the standard frame and the expansion frames can be all received. When receive the standard frame, the ID bits is 11, but will still occupy the 32 bits memory combined by [D1,D0]

8 bits data transfer: the transfer data is: D0L、D1L、D2L、D3L……(D0L means the low byte of D0)

16 bits data transfer: the transfer data is: D0L、D0H、D1L、D1H……(D0H means the high byte of D0)

Relate Special Soft Components List

1. System FD8000 Setting ID Function Description

FD8350 CAN Mode 0: not usable 1: XC-CAN network 2: Free format FREE

FD8351 CAN baud rate

0, 1KBPS initial value, actual is 5KBPS. 1, 2KBPS initial value, actual is 5KBPS. 2, 5KBPS initial value 3, 10KBPS initial value 4, 20KBPS initial value 5, 40KBPS initial value 6, 50KBPS initial value 7, 80KBPS initial value 8, 100KBPS initial value 9, 150KBPS initial value 10, 200KBPS initial value 11, 250KBPS initial value 12, 300KBPS initial value

13, 400KBPS initial value 14, 500KBPS initial value 15, 600KBPS initial value 16, 800KBPS initial value 17, 1000KBPS initial value

FD8358 CAN free format mode

low 8 bits: 0-standard frame . low 8 bits: 1-expansion frame high 8 bits: 0-8 bits data store high 8 bits: 1-16 bits data store

FD8359 CAN accept timeout time

for free format using, unit: ms

CAN send timeout time

fixed to be 5ms

2. System M8000 flag

ID Function Description

M8240 CAN error flag

ON: error happens OFF: normal if set M8242 as ON, and manually set M8240 as ON, this will enable CAN reset

M8241 CAN node dropped off flag

XC-CAN mode valid ON: certain node/nodes are dropped off OFF: Normal

M8242 do reset or not if CAN error happens

ON: CAN reset automatically when error happens OFF: take no operation when error happens

M8243 CAN send/accept finished flag

FREE mode valid ON: receive/accept finish reset ON automatically when starting to send/accept

M8244 CAN send/accept timeout flag

FREE mode valid ON: send/accept timeout Set OFF automatically when starting to send/accept

3. System D8000

ID Function Description

D8240 CAN error information

0: no error 2: initializing error 30: CAN bus error 31: error alarm 32: data overflow

D8241 configure item number when XC-CAN valid

error happens

D8242 data package number sent every second

both XC-CAN and FREE modes are valid

D8243 data package number accepted every second

both XC-CAN and FREE modes are valid

D8244 CAN communication error counter

correspond with M8240 at every CAN error, M8240 will be set ON one time, D8244 increase 1

Note: when D8240 is not zero, please try the follow operations:

1. Check the wiring 2. Decrease baud rate or increase sending frequency

Applications Example 1: instruction communication PLC station 1 and PLC station 2 communicate with each other through CAN instructions. Program: (1) M0 is ON, send D100 of PLC station 1 to D20 of PLC station 2 (Y0 and Y2 is ON) (2) M4 is ON, send D4000 of PLC station 2 to D0 of PLC station 1. Ladder chart: PLC station 1:

Set CAN baud rate = 1000K, sending frequency=5, CAN station no.1, master station no. 1022

Write these parameters in PLC, cut off and power on the power again

MOV K5 D100M8002

M0 M8013

CREGW K2 K20 K1 D100

CREGR K2 K4000 K1 D0

M4

PLC station 2:

Example 2: Internal protocol PLC station 1 and station 2 communicate with each other through CAN internal communication mode. Program: (1) send (D4000, D4001) of station 2 to (D0, D1) of station 1 (2) send M0 state of station 1 to M0 of station 2, show the M0 state in Y0 of station 2 (3) set on M0 when station 1 power on Programming and ladder chart:

(1) Open XCPpro software, click , configure station 1.

send M0 state of station 1 to M0 of station 2

set on M0 when station 1 power on

(1) Open XCPpro software, click , configure station 2.

send (D4000, D4001) of station 2 to (D0, D1) of station 1

send M0 state of station 1 to M0 of station 2, show the M0 state in Y0 of station 2

Example 3: Free format (please set FD8350 to 2 first) Two Xinje PLCs communicate with each other through CAN free format mode Program: (1) PLC station 1 sends the data package ID100 (4 bytes starts from D4000) every 1s

(2) When M0 is ON, PLC station 2 receives data package ID100 (4 bytes, ID filter code is defaulted), then save the data in register starts from D4000.

Ladder chart: PLC station 1:

PLC station 2:

8 PID Control Function In this chapter, we mainly introduce the applications of PID instructions for XC series PLC basic units, including: call the instructions, set the parameters, items to notice, sample programs etc.

8-1. Brief Introduction of The Functions

8-2. Instruction Formats

8-7. Sample Programs

8-5. Advanced Mode

8-6.Application Outlines

8-4. Auto Tune Mode

8-3. Parameter Setting

8-1．Brief Introductions of The Functions PID instruction and auto tune function are added into XC series PLC basic units (Version 3.0 and above). Via auto tune method, users can get the best sampling time and PID parameters and improve the control precision.

The previous versions can not support PID function on basic units unless they extend analog module or BD cards. PID instruction has brought many facilities to the users. 1. The output can be data form D and on-off quantity Y, user can choose them freely when program. 2. Via auto tune, users can get the best sampling time and PID parameters and improve the control precision. 3. User can choose positive or negative action via software setting. The former is used to heating control; the later is used to cooling control. 4. PID control separates the basic units with the expansions; this improves the flexibility of this function. 5. A new PID algorithm-critical oscillation is added in v3.3 and higher version of PLC. For temperature control object: Step response method: the PID auto tune will start when current temperature of object is equal to ambient temperature. Critical oscillation method: the PID auto tune will start at any temperature. 8-2．Instruction Forms 1、Brief Introductions of the Instructions

Execute PID control instructions with the data in specified registers. PID control [PID] 16 bits instruction

PID 32 bits instruction

-

Executing Condition

Normally ON/normally closed coil activates

Suitable Models


Hardware Condition

V3.0 or above Software Condition

V3.0 or above V3.3a and above (critical oscillation)

V3.3f and above (critical oscillation)

2、Operands

Operands Usage Type S1 set the address of the target value (SV) 16bits, BIN S2 set the address of the tested value (PV) 16 bits, BIN S3 set the start address of the control parameters 16 bits, BIN D the address of the operation result (MV) or output port 16 bits, BIN; bit


PID D0 D10 D4000 D100

X0D·S1· S2· S3·

PID D0 D10 D4000 Y0

X0D·S1· S2· S3·

S3~ S3+ 43 will be occupied by this instruction, so please don’t use them as the

common data registers.

This instruction executes when each sampling time interval comes.

To the operation result D, the data registers are used to store PID output values; the output points are used to output the occupy space ratio in the form of ON/OFF.

PID control rules are shown as below:

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Type


Bit

Type



S1 ● ●

S2 ● ●

S3 ●

D ● ●

u(t) c(t) r(t) + e(t)

Proportion

Integral

Differential

Be controlled object

+

+

+

-

e(t) = r (t ) –c ( t ) (1-1) u(t) = Kp [ e ( t ) + 1/Ti∫e(t)dt + TD de(t)/dt] (1-2)

Here, e(t) is warp, r(t) is the given value, c(t) is the actual output value, u(t) is the control value;

In function (1-2), Kp is the proportion coefficient, Ti is the integration time coefficient, and TD is the differential time coefficient. The result of the operation: 1. Analog output: MV= digital form of u (t), the default range is 0 ~ 4095. 2. Digital output: Y=T*[MV/PID output upper limit]. Y is the output’s activate time within the

control cycle. T is the control cycle, equals to the sampling time. PID output upper limit default value is 4095.

8-3．Parameters Setting Users can call PID instruction in XCP Pro software directly and set the parameters in the window (see graph below), for the details please refer to XCPPro user manual. Users can also write the parameters into the specified registers by MOV instructions before PID operation.

Auto tune mode:

V3.3f and higher version software can choose auto tune mode: step response or critical oscillation.

8-3-1．Registers and their functions For PID control instruction’s relative parameters ID, please refer to the below table:

ID Function Description Memo S3 sampling time 32 bits without sign Unit: ms S3+1 sampling time 32 bits without sign Unit: ms S3+2 mode setting bit0:

0: Negative action; 1 positive action; bit1~bit6 not usable bit7: 0: Manual PID; 1: auto tune PID bit8: 1: auto tune successful flag bit9~bit10 auto tune method

00: step response 01: critical oscillation Bit11~bit12: not use Bit13~bit14: auto tune PID mode(valid in critical oscillation mode) 00: PID control 01: PI control 10: P control bit15: 0: regular mode; 1: advanced mode

S3+3 Proportion Gain (Kp) Range: 1～32767[%] S3+4 Integration time (TI) 0～32767[*100ms] 0 is taken as no integral. S3+5 Differential time (TD) 0～32767[*10ms] 0 is taken as no differential. S3+6 PID operation zone 0～32767 PID adjustment band width

value. S3+7 control death zone 0～32767 PID value keeps constant in

death zone S3+8 PID auto tune cycle

varied value full scale AD value * (0.3~1%)

S3+9 PID auto tune overshoot permission

0: enable overshoot 1:not overshoot

(valid when using step response method)

S3+10 current target value adjustment percent in auto tune finishing transition stage

S3+11 current target value resident count in auto tune finishing transition stage

S3+12~ S3+39

occupied by PID operation’s internal process

Below is the ID of advanced PID mode setting S3+40 Input filter constant (a) 0~99[%] 0: no input filter S3+41 Differential gain (KD) 0~100[%] 0: no differential gain S3+42 Output upper limit value -32767~32767 S3+43 Output lower limit value -32767~32767

8-3-2．Parameters Description

Movement Direction:

Positive movement: the output value MV will increase with the increasing of the detected value PV, usually used for cooling control.

Negative movement: the output value MV will decrease with the increasing of the detected value PV, usually used for heating control.

Mode Setting

Common Mode: The parameter’s register zone is from S3 to S3+43, S3 to S3+11 needs to be set by users. S3+12 to S3+43+12 are occupied by the system, users can’t use them.

Advanced Mode The parameter’s register zone is from S3 to S3+43, S3 to (S3+11) and (S3+40) to (S3+43) need to be set by users. (S3+12) to (S3+39) are occupied by the system, users can’t use them.

Sample Time [S3]

The system samples the current value according to certain time interval and compare them with the output value. This time interval is the sample time T. There is no requirement for T during AD output. T should be larger than one PLC scan period during port output. T value should be chosen among 100~1000 times of PLC scan periods.

PID Operation Zone [S3+6]

PID control is entirely opened at the beginning and close to the target value with the highest speed (the defaulted value is 4095), when it entered into the PID computation range, parameters Kp, Ti, TD will be effective. See graph below:

If the target value is 100, PID operation zone is 10, then the real PID’s operation zone is from 90 to 110.

Death Region [S3+7]

If the detected value changed slightly for a long time, and PID control is still in working mode, then it belongs to meanless control. Via setting the control death region, we can overcome this condition. See graph below:

Suppose: we set the death region value to be 10. Then in the above graph, the difference is only 2 comparing the current value with the last value. It will not do PID control. The difference is 13 (more than death region 10) comparing the current value with the next value, this difference value is larger than control death region value, it will do the PID control with 135. 8-4．Auto Tune Mode If users do not know how to set the PID parameters, they can choose auto tune mode which can find the best control parameters (sampling time, proportion gain Kp, integral time Ti, differential time TD) automatically. Auto tune mode is suitable for these objects: temperature, pressure; not suitable for liquid level and flow. For step response method: Users can set the sampling cycle to be 0 at the beginning of the auto tune process then modify the value manually in terms of practical needs after the auto tune process is completed. For step response method: Before doing auto tune, the system should be under the non-control steady state. Take the temperature for example; the detected temperature should be the same to the environment temperature. For critical oscillation method: user needs to set the sampling time at the beginning of the auto tune process. Reference value: for slow response system, 1000ms. For high response system, 10-100ms. For critical oscillation method: the system can start the auto tune at any state. For temperature object, the current temperature doesn’t need to be same to ambient temperature. Two different method and PID control diagram:

(1) Step response method Make sure current temperature is equal to ambient temperature

(2) Critical oscillation method The auto tune start temperature can be any value

To enter the auto tune mode, please set bit7 of (S3+ 2) to be 1 and turn on PID working condition.

If bit8 of (S3+ 2) turn to 1, it means the auto tune is successful.

PID auto tune period value [S3+ 8]

Set this value in [S3+ 8] during auto tune. This value decides the auto tune performance, in a general way, set this value to be the AD result corresponding to one standard detected unit. The default value is 10. The suggested setting range: full-scale AD result × 0.3 ~ 1%. User doesn’t need to change this value. However, if the system is interfered greatly by outside, this value should be increased modestly to avoid wrong judgment for positive or negative movement. If this value is too large, the PID control period (sampling time) got from the auto tune process will be too long. As the result do not set this value too large. ※1: if users have no experience, please use the defaulted value 10, set PID sampling time (control period) to be 0ms then start the auto tune.

PID auto tune overshooting permission setting [S3+ 9] If set 0, overshooting is permitted, the system can study the optimal PID parameters all the time. But in auto tune process, detected value may be lower or higher than the target value, safety factor

should be considered here.

If set 1, overshooting is not permitted. For these objectives which have strict safety demand such

as pressure vessel, set [S3+ 9] to be 1 to prevent from detected value seriously over the target

value. In this process, if [S3+ 2] bit8 changes from 0 to 1, it means the auto tune is successful and

the optimal parameters are got; if [S3+ 2] is always 0 until [S3+ 2] bit7 changes from 1 to 0, it

means the auto tune is completed but the parameters are not the best and need to be modified by

users.

Every adjustment percent of current target value at auto tune process finishing transition

stage [S3+10]

This parameter is effective only when [S3+ 9] is 1.

If doing PID control after auto tune, small range of overshooting may be occurred. It is better to

decrease this parameter to control the overshooting. But response delay may occur if this value is

too small. The defaulted value is 100% which means the parameter is not effective. The

recommended range is 50~80%.

Cutline Explanation: Current target value adjustment percent is 2/3 (S3 + 10 = 67%), the original temperature of the system is 0 ºC, target temperature is 100 ºC, the current target temperature adjustment situation is shown as below:

Next current target value = current target value + (final target value – current target value ) × 2/3;

So the changing sequence of current target is 66 ºC, 88 ºC, 96 ºC, 98 ºC, 99 ºC, 100 ºC.

℃

t

100 96 88

66

Current system value

Current target 3 Current target 2

Current target 1

Target value

The stay times of the current target value in auto tune process finishing transition stage [S3+11]

This parameter is valid only when [S3+9] is 1; If entering into PID control directly after auto tune, small range of overshoot may occur. It is good for preventing the overshoot if increasing this parameter properly. But it will cause response lag if this value is too large. The default value is 15 times. The recommended range is from 5 to 20. 8-5．Advanced Mode Users can set some parameters in advanced mode in order to get the better effect of PID control. Enter into the advanced mode, please set [S3+2] bit 15 to be 1, or set it in the XCP Pro software. Input Filter constant

It will smooth the sampling value. The default value is 0% which means no filter. Differential Gain The low pass filtering process will relax the sharp change of the output value. The default value is 50%, the relaxing effect will be more obviously if increasing this value. Users do not need to change it. Upper-limit and lower-limit value Users can choose the analog output range via setting this value. Default value: lower- limit output= 0 Upper -limit= 4095 8-6．Application Outlines Under the circumstances of continuous output, the system whose effect ability will die down

with the change of the feedback value can do self-study, such as temperature or pressure. It is not suitable for flux or liquid level.

Under the condition of overshoot permission, the system will get the optimal PID parameters from self-study.

Under the condition of overshoot not allowed, the PID parameters got from self-study is up to the target value, it means that different target value will produce different PID parameters which are not the optimal parameters of the system and for reference only.

If the self-study is not available, users can set the PID parameters according to practical experience. Users need to modify the parameters when debugging. Below are some experience values of the control system for your reference:

8-7．Application PID Control Program is shown below:

Soft component function comments: D4000.7: auto tune bit D4002.8: auto tune successful sign M0: normal PID control M1: auto tune control M2: enter into PID control after auto tune

// Move ID100 content into D10

// convert PID mode to be auto tune at

the beginning of auto tune control

starts or auto tune finish

// start PID, D0 is target value, D10 is

detected value, from D4000 the zone

is PID parameters area; output PID

result via Y0

// PID control finish, close auto tune PID

mode

// if auto tune is successful, and

overshoot is permitted, close auto

tune control bit, auto tune finish;

If auto tune turns to be manual mode,

and auto tune is not permitted, close

auto tune control bit

Temperature system: P (%) 2000 ~ 6000, I (minutes) 3 ~ 10, D (minutes) 0.5 ~ 3 Flux system: P (%) 4000 ~ 10000, I (minutes) 0.1 ~ 1 Pressure system: P (%) 3000 ~ 7000, I (minutes) 0.4 ~ 3 Liquid level system: P (%) 2000 ~ 8000, I (minutes) 1 ~ 5

9 C Language Function Block In this chapter, we focus on C language function block’s specifications, edition, instruction calling, application points etc. we also attach the common Function list.


9-2．Instrument Form

9-3．Operation Steps

9-4．Import and Export of the Functions

9-5．Edit the Function Block

9-6．Example Program

9-7．Application Points

9-8．Function List

9-1．Summary This is the new added function in XCPPro software. This function enables the customers to write program via C language in XCPPo; and call the C program at any necessary place. This function supports most of C language functions, strength the program’s security. As users can call the function at many places and call different functions, this function increase the programmer’s efficiency greatly.

9-2．Instruction Format 1、Instruction Summary

Call the C language Func Block at the specified place Call the C language Func Block [NAME_C] 16 bits Instruction

NAME_C 32 bits Instruction

-

Execution Condition

Normally ON/OFF, Rising/Falling Edge activation

Suitable Models

XC1, XC2, XC3, XC5, XCM, XCC


V3.0C and above Software Requirement

V3.0C and above

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 name of C Func Block, defined by the user String S2 Correspond with the start ID of word W in C language

Function 16 bits, BIN

S3 Correspond with the start ID of word B in C language Function

16 bits, BIN


Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S3 ●

Word

Bit



S2 ●

NAME_C D0 M0X0

S1· S2· S3·

The name is composed by numbers, letters and underlines, the first character

can’t be numbers, the name’s length shouldn’t longer than 8 ASC. The name can’t be same with PLC’s self instructions like LD,ADD,SUB,PLSR

etc. The name can’t be same with the func blocks exist in current PLC; 9-3．Operation Steps 1、Open PLC edit tool, in the left “Project” toolbar, choose “Func Block”, right click it

and choose”Add New Func Block”

2、See graph below, fill in the information of your function;


3、After new create the Func Block, you can see the edit interface as shown below:

Parameters’ transfer format: if call the Func Block in ladder, the transferred D

and M is the start ID of W and B. Take the above graph as the example, start with D0 and M0, then W[0] is D0, W[10] is D10, B［0 is M0, B［10］is M10. If in the ladder the used parameters are D100, M100, then W[0] is D100, B［0］is M100. So, word and bit component’s start address is defined in PLC program by the user.

Parameter W: represent Word soft component, use in the form of data group. E.g. W[0]=1;W[1]=W[2]+W[3]; in the program, use according to standard C language

Edit your C language program between “{}”

Main function’s name (it’s function block’s name, this name can’t be changed freely, and users should modify in the edit window.

WORD W: correspond with soft component D BIT B: correspond with soft component M

rules. Parameter B: represent Bit soft component, use in the form of data group.

Support SET and RESET. E.g: B[0]=1;B[1]=0; And assignment, for example B[0]=B[1]。

Double-word operation: add D in front of W, e.g. DW[10]=100000, it means assignment to the double-word W[10]W[11]

Floating Operation: Support the definition of floating variable in the function, and execute floating operation;

Function Library: In Func Block, users can use the Functions and Variables in function library directly. For the Functions and Variables in function library, see the list in Appendix.

The other data type supported: BOOL; //BOOL Quantity

INT8U; //8 bits unsigned integral INT8S; //8 bits signed integral

INT16U //16 bits unsigned integral INT16S //8 bits signed integral

INT32U //32 bits unsigned integral INT32S //32 bits signed integral

FP32; //Single precision Floating FP64; // Doubleprecision Floating

Predefined Marco #define true 1 #define false 0 #define TRUE 1 #define FALSE 0

9-4．Import and Export the Functions 1、Export (1) Function: export the function as the file, then other PLC program can import to use;

(2) Export Format

a) Editable; export the source codes out and save as a file. If import again, the file is editable; b) Not editable: don’t export the source code, if import the file, it’s not editable;

2、Import

Function; Import the exist Func Block file, to use in the PLC program;

Choose the Func Block, right click “Import Func Block From Disk”, choose the correct file, then click OK.

9-5．Edit the Func Blocks Example: Add D0 and D1 in PLC’s registers, then assign the value to D2; (1) In “Project” toolbar, new create a Func Block, here we name the Func Block as

ADD_2, then edit C language program; (2) Click compile after edition

According to the information shown in the output blank, we can search and modify the grammar error in C language program. Here we can see that in the program there is no “;” sign behind W[2]=W[0]+W[1];

Compile the program again after modify the program. In the information list, we can corfirm that there is no grammar error in the program;

The information list

(3) Write PLC program, assign value 10 and 20 into registers D0, D1 separately, then call Func Block ADD_2, see graph below:

(4) Download program into PLC, run PLC and set M0.

(5) From Free Monitor in he toolbar, we can see that D2 changes to be 30, it means the assignment is successful;

Free Monitor

9-6．Program Example If PLC needs to do complicated calculation (including plus and minus calculation), the calculation will be used for many times, C language function is easy to use. Example 1: Calculation a=b/c+b*c+(c-3)*d. Method 1: use ladder chart: Get the result of c-3 Get the result of three multiplication equations Get the sum Ladder chart only support two original operands, it needs many steps to get the result.

Note:

1. The result of MUL is Dword, the result is stored in D14~D15. 2. The result of DIV has quotient D16 and remainder D17. If D17 has value, the

calculation precision will decrease. Please use float format to ensure the precision.

3. D16 quotient is word value, in plus calculation all the data should be changed to Dword. The final result is stored in D22~D23.

Method 2: use C language Ladder chart:

目标值

P I D 运算范围

P I D 全开区

时间 t

输出值

C program:

RESULT Function name D0 In the function, W[0]=D0, W[1]=D1….

If S2=D32, then W[0]=D32, W[1]=D33…. M0 In the function, B[0]=M0, B[1]=M1…..

If S2=M32, then B[0]=M32, B[1]=M33…. Method 2 can simplify the program. The C function is the same to ladder chart of method 1. The precision is not high. If it needs to get the high precision, please use float calculation. Example 2: calculate CRC parity value via Func Block CRC calculation rules: (1) Set 16 bits register (CRC register) = FFFF H (2) XOR (Exclusive OR) 8 bits information with the low byte of the 16 bits CRC register. (3) Right shift 1 bit of CRC register, fill 0 in the highest bit. (4) Check the right shifted value, if it is 0, save the new value from step3 into CRC register; if it is not 0, XOR the CRC register value with A001 H and save the result into the CRC register. (5) Repeat step3&4 until all the 8 bits have been calculated. (6) Repeat step2~5, then calculate the next 8 bits information. Until all the information has been calculated, the result will be the CRC parity code in CRC register.

Edit C language Function Block program, see graph below:

Edit PLC ladder program, D0: Parity data byte number; D1~D5: Parity data’s content, see graph below:

MOV H5 D0M8002

MOV H12 D1

MOV H34 D2

MOV H56 D3

MOV H78 D4

MOV H90 D5

CRC_CHECK D0 M0M8002

Download to PLC, then RUN PLC, set M0, via Free Monitor, we can find that values in D6

and D7 are the highest and lowest bit of CRC parity value;

9-7．Application Points When upload the PLC program in which there are some Func Blocks, the Func

Blocks can’t be uploaded, there will be an error say: There is an unknown instruction;

In one Func Block file, you can write many functions, they can be call each other; Each Func Block files is independent, they can’t call each other; Func Block files can call C language library functions in form of floating,

arithmetic like sin, cos, tan etc.

XCPpro software v3.3 and later version add C function library:

In this function block, user can call the C function directly:

For example: click TEL10, the function name will show on the project bar:

User can call it in the ladder chart editing window.

9-8．Function Table

The default function library

Constant Data Description _LOG2 (double)0.693147180559945309417232121458 Logarithm of 2

_LOG10 (double)2.3025850929940459010936137929093 Logarithm of 10

_SQRT2 (double)1.41421356237309504880168872421 Radical of 2

_PI (double)3.1415926535897932384626433832795 PI

_PIP2 (double)1.57079632679489661923132169163975 PI/2

_PIP2x3 (double)4.71238898038468985769396507491925 PI*3/2

String Function Description

void * memchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n); Return the first c position among n words before s position

int memcmp(const void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n); Compare the first n words of position s1 and s2

void * memcpy(void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n); Copy n words from position s2 to s1and return s1

void * memset(void *s, int c, size_t n); Replace the n words start from s position with word c, and return position s

char * strcat(char *s1, const char *s2); Connect string ct behind string s

char * strchr(const char *s, int c); Return the first word c position in string s

int strcmp(const char *s1, const char *s2); Compare string s1 and s2 char * strcpy(char *s1, const char *s2); Copy string s1 to string s2

Double-precision math

function Single-precision math

function Description

double acos(double x); float acosf(float x); Inverse cosine function. double asin(double x); float asinf(float x); Inverse sine function double atan(double x); float atanf(float x); Inverse tangent function double atan2(double y, double x);

float atan2f(float y, float x); Inverse tangent value of parameter (y/x)

double ceil(double x); float ceilf(float x); Return the smallest double integral which is greater or equal with parameter x

double cos(double x); float cosf(float x); Cosine function

double cosh(double x); float coshf(float x); Hyperbolic cosine function cosh(x)=(e^x+e^(-x))/2.

double exp(double x); float expf(float x); Exponent (e^x) of a nature data double fabs(double x); float fabsf(float x); Absolute value of parameter x double floor(double x); float floorf(float x); Return the largets dounble

integral which is smaller or equals with x

double fmod(double x, double y);

float fmodf(float x, float y); If y is not zero, return the reminder of floating x/y

double frexp(double val, int _far *exp);

float frexpf(float val, int _far *exp);

Break floating data x to be mantissa and exponent x = m*2^exp, return the mantissa of m, save the logarithm into exp.

double ldexp(double x, int exp);

float ldexpf(float x, int exp);

X multipy the (two to the power of n) is x*2^n.

double log(double x); float logf(float x); Nature logarithm logx double log10(double x); float log10f(float x); logarithm (log10x)

double modf(double val, double *pd);

float modff(float val, float *pd);

Break floating data X to be integral part and decimal part, return the decimal part, save the integral part into parameter ip.

double pow(double x, double y);

float powf(float x, float y); Power value of parameter y (x^y)

double sin(double x); float sinf(float x); sine function

double sinh(double x); float sinhf(float x); Hyperbolic sine function, sinh(x)=(e^x-e^(-x))/2.

double sqrt(double x); float sqrtf(float x); Square root of parameter X

double tan(double x); float tanf(float x); tangent function.

double tanh(double x); float tanhf(float x); Hyperbolic tangent function, tanh(x)=(e^x-e^(-x))/(e^2+e^(-x)).

The using method of the functions in the table:

Take function arcsin as an example. float asinf (float x); float asinf: float means the return value is float format; float x: float means the function formal parameter is float format. In actual using, it no needs to write the float. See line14 in the following example:

10 SEQUENCE BLOCK

This chapter will introduce the sequence block instruction and the application.

10-1. Concept of the BLOCK

10-2. Call the BLOCK

10-3. Edit the instruction inside the BLOCK

10-4. Running form of the BLOCK

10-5. BLOCK instruction editing rules

10-6. BLOCK related instructions

10-7. BLOCK flag bit and register

10-8. Program example

Block instruction:

Instruction Function Ladder chart Chapter

Block

SBSTOP Stop the BLOCK SBSTOP S1 S2

10-6-1

SBGOON Continue running the

BLOCK SBGOON S1 S2

10-6-1

10-1．Concept of the BLOCK

10-1-1．BLOCK summarization

Sequence block, which is also called block, is a program block can realize certain function. Block is a special flow, all the instructions run in order; this is the difference from other flows. BLOCK starts from SBLOCK and ends by SBLOCKE, you can write program between them. If there are many pulse output instructions (or other instructions), they will run one after one according to the condition. After one pulse outputting over then the next pulse will output.

The construction of the block is as the following:

※1: The BLOCK quantity can up to 100 for XC series PLC, XC3-14 BLOCK quantity is 30.

User’s program

Pulse output Communication Frequency inverter Wait instruction Instruction list

SBLOCK n

SBLOCKE

BLOCK start

The instructions in the BLOCK run one after one

BLOCK end

10-1-2．The reason to use BLOCK

To optimize the editing method of pulse and communication instruction in the process In former program, XC series PLC can not support many pulse or communication

instructions in one process, but BLOCK can support this and the instructions will run in sequence.

Unavailable （×） Available （√）

Former

After using block

DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0

M0

DPLSR D6 D8 D10 Y0

SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

Former

After using block

M0

SBLOCK communication

COLR K1 K500 K3 M1 K2

COLR K2 K500 K3 M1 K2

SBLOCKE

Note: when the trigger condition of BLOCK is normal ON coil, the BLOCK will execute one by one from up to down circular until the condition is OFF. When the trigger condition of BLOCK is rising edge, the BLOCK will execute once from up to down. 10-2．Call the BLOCK

In one program file, it can call many BLOCK; the following is the method to add BLOCK in the program.

10-2-1．Add the BLOCK

Open XCPpro software, right click the sequence block in the project bar:

Click “add sequence block” will show below window:

You can edit the program in this window. Upwards and downwards are used to change the

position of the instruction in the block. There is a “Insert” choice on the bottom left of the window, when selecting it, the add button

will become insert:

The difference between insert and add: Add is to add instructions in the end of the block; insert can add instruction in any place in

the block. Click add button, you will see the instructions can be added in the block.

For example, add a pulse item in the program:

Click ok, the pulse item is added in the list:

Click ok, the BLOCK will show in the program:

10-2-2．Move the BLOCK

If you want to move the block to other position, you have to select the former block and delete it.

Then put the cursor in the place you want to move:

Right click the “add to lad” in the project bar:

Now the block is moved to the new place:

10-2-3．Delete the BLOCK

You can select the whole block and delete it. If you want to delete the block forever, please right click the block you want to delete in the project bar and select “delete sequence block”. After this operation, you can not call this block anymore.

10-2-4．Modify the BLOCK

There are two methods to modify the block. （A）double click the start or end instruction to modify all the instructions in the block.

（B）double click one instruction in the block to modify it:

10-3．Edit the instruction inside the BLOCK

10-3-1．Common item

Use command to edit the program. Open the block editing window, click add/common item:

It will show the editing window:

User can add instructions in this window.

SKIP condition: can control the stop and running of the instructions. When select skip and enter coil in it, if the coil is ON, the instructions will stop.

Comment: can modify the note for this instruction.

After setting, the block will be changed as the following:

10-3-2．Pulse item

Open the pulse item window:

Set the pulse output frequency, numbers, output terminals, accelerate/decelerate time and so

on. Then add the pulse instruction in the block:

※1：The pulse output instructions are all 32bits.

10-3-3．Modbus item

Open the modbus item window:

Select the modbus instructions, set the address and com port, then software will build an

instruction.

10-3-4．Wait item

There are two modes to wait. (A) flag bit

(B) timer wait

The ladder chart is as the following:

10-3-5．Frequency inverter item

Users only have to set the parameters in below window, the PLC will communicate with the frequency inverter.

There are four areas in the window, the following will introduce one by one: (A) Inverter station number and serial number

Set the station number of the frequency inverter and the PLC serial port:

(B) Control inverter action There are two modes to set parameters. First one is write constant value:

Second one is to set the parameters in register:

(C) Inverter status read into To read the status from the frequency inverter to the PLC register.

(D) User define To write or read the frequency inverter address flexible.

For example, add a writing inverter instruction:

Add a reading inverter instruction:

The result after adding:

※1：Frequency inverter instructions will not expand in the block.

10-3-6．Free format communication item Add free format communication instructions in the block. For example, select “send” instruction, first address set to D0, serial port is 2, 16 bits.

There are two methods to set the data. Const data is to set the value directly. Reg is to set the

value via register.

Change to check out tab, select the checking mode.

Besides, it needs to set the communication parameters. Click “serial port config”:

10-4．Running form of the BLOCK 1. If there are many blocks, they run as the normal program. The block is running when the condition is ON. (A) The condition is normal ON, normal OFF coil

M1SBLOCK Sequence block 1

SBLOCK Sequence block 2


M2

M3

(B) the condition is rising or falling edge of pulse

When M1, M2, M3 is from OFF to ON, all these blocks will run once.

2. The instructions in the block run in sequence according to the scanning time. They run one after

another when the condition is ON. (A) Without SKIP condition

Scanning period 1 Scanning period 2 Scanning period 3

Block1 Block1, Block2 Block1, Block2, Block3

M1

M2

M3

M1




M2

M3

↑

↑

↑

The instructions running sequence in block 1 is shown as below:

(B) With SKIP condition

Scanning period 1 Scanning period 2 Scanning period 3 Scanning period 4 Scanning period 5

PLS Y0 PLS Y1 Inverter config

BLOCK running

BLOCK condition is

OFF and all the

sequence instructions

are finished running.

M2

M2


Inverter Config

SBLOCKE

↑

M0( )

Y0

M1( )

Y1

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y0

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y1

Explanation: A) When M2 is ON, block 1 is running. B) All the instructions run in sequence in the block. C) M3, M4, M5 are the sign of SKIP, when they are ON, this instruction will not run. D) When M3 is OFF, if no other instructions use this Y0 pulse , DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0 will

run; if not, the DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0 will run after it is released by other instructions. E) After “DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0” is over, check M4. If M4 is OFF, check “DPLSR D0 D2

D4 Y1”, if M4 is ON, check M5. If M5 is OFF, “inverter config” will run. 10-5．BLOCK instruction editing rules

In the BLOCK, the instruction editing should accord with some standards.

1. Do not use the same pulse output terminal in different BLOCK.

NO（×） YES（√）

M2SBLOCK Sequence block1

Inverter config

SBLOCKE

M0( )

Y0

M1( )

Y1

DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0

DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y1

M3

M4

M5

DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0

M 0 SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

M1

M2

DPLSR D10 D12 D14 Y0


SBLOCKE

DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y 0


SBLOCKE

M1

M 2



SBLOCKE

2. Do not use the same pulse output terminal in BLOCK and main program.


3. There only can be one SKIP condition for one BLOCK instruction.


4. The SKIP condition only can use M, X, can not use other coil or register.


DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0 M0

M2



SBLOCKE

DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y1 M 0

M 2



SBLOCKE

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y 0

M0 SBLOCK Sequence block1

SBLOCKE

M 1 M2

DPLSR D 0 D2 D4 Y 0


SBLOCKE

M 1

DPLSR D0 D2 D 4 Y0

M0


SBLOCKE

T 0

M2 [D10]

DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y1

DPLSR D0 D2 D 4 Y0

M0


SBLOCKE

X0

M2

DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y1

5. The output instructions can not be HSC, PLSF, PWM, FRQM.


6. LabelKind type can not be used in the block

Sign P, I can not be used in block. Even they can be added in block, but they do not work in fact.

7. BLOCK is not recommended to put in the STL. Because if one STL ends, but the BLOCK doesn’t end, big problem will happen.


HSCR C600 D0

M0


SBLOCKE

M1

M2 PLSF D 0 Y0

PWM K100 D 0 Y1

M3

DPLSY K30 D1 Y 0

M0


SBLOCKE

M 1

M 2 DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y1

10-6．BLOCK related instructions

10-6-1．Instruction explanation

stop running the BLOCK [SBSTOP] 1、Summarization

Stop the instructions running in the block

[SBSTOP] 16 bits SBSTOP 32 bits - Condition NO,NC coil and pulse edge Suitable types XC1, XC2, XC3, XC5, XCM,

XCC Hardware Software -

2、Operand Operand Function Type S1 The number of the BLOCK 16 bits, BIN S2 The mode to stop the BLOCK 16 bits, BIN

3、Suitable component

S2 is the mode to stop BLOCK, operand K0, K1 K0: stop the BLOCK slowly, if the pulse is outputting, the BLOCK will stop after the pulse outputting is finished.

K1: stop the BLOCK immediately; stop all the instructions running in the BLOCK.

Word

Function

Operand Register Constant Module


S1 ● ●

S2 K

SBSTOP K1 K0M1

S1· S2·

↑

Continue running the BLOCK[SBGOON] 1、Summarization

This instruction is opposite to BSTOP. To continue running the BLOCK. [SBGOON] 16 bits SBGOON 32 bits - Condition Pulse edge Suitable types XC1, XC2, XC3, XC5, XCM,

XCC Hardware - Software -

2、Operand Operand Function Type S1 The number of the BLOCK 16 bits, BIN S2 The mode to continue running the BLOCK 16 bits, BIN

3、Suitable component

Word Comp onent

Function

Operand Register Constant Module


S1 ● ●

S2 K

SBGOON K1 K0M3

S1· S2·

↑

S2 is the mode to continue running the BLOCK. Operand: K0, K1. K0: continue running the instructions in the BLOCK. For example, if pulse outputting stopped last time, SBGOON will continue outputting the rest pulse. K1: continue running the BLOCK, but abandon the instructions have not finished last time. Such as the pulse output instruction, if the pulse has not finished last time, SBGOON will not continue outputting this pulse but go to the next instruction in the BLOCK.

10-6-2．The timing sequence of the instructions 1. SBSTOP (K1 K1) + SBGOON (K1 K1)

When M0 is from OFF→ON, run “DSPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0” in the BLOCK to output the pulse; when M2 is from OFF→ON, the BLOCK stops running, pulse outputting stops at once; when M4 is from OFF→ON, abandon the rest pulse.

Scanning period1 Scanning period 2 Scanning period 3

Condition M0

Scanning period 4 Scanning period 5

Condition M2

Condition M4

PLS Y0

2. SBSTOP (K1 K1) + SBGOON (K1 K0)

When M0 is from OFF→ON, run “DSPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0” in the BLOCK to output the

pulse; when M2 is from OFF→ON, the BLOCK stops running, the pulse outputting stops at once; when M4 is from OFF→ON, output the rest pulses.


Condition M0


Condition M2

Condition M4

PLS Y0

PLS Y0

3. SBSTOP (K1 K0) + SBGOON (K1 K1)


pulse; when M1 is from OFF→ON, stop the BLOCK, the pulse will stop slowly with slope, when M4 is from OFF→ON, abandon the rest pulses.


Condition M0


Condition M1

Condition M4

PLS Y0

4. SBSTOP (K1 K0)+ SBGOON (K1 K0)


pulse; when M1 is from OFF→ON, stop running the BLOCK, the pulse will stop slowly with slope; when M3 is from OFF→ON, output the rest pulses. Please note that though the SBSTOP stops the pulse with slope, there maybe still some pulses; in this case, if run SBGOON K1 K1 again, it will output the rest of the pulses.


Condition M0


Condition M1

Condition M3

PLS Y0

PLS Y0

10-7．BLOCK flag bit and register

1、BLOCK flag bit:

2、BLOCK flag register

Address Function Explanation

M8630

1: running 0: not running

M8631 BLOCK1 running flag


……. …….

…….. …….


Address Function Explanation

D8630

BLOCK use this value when monitoring

D 8631 BLOCK1 current running instruction

D8632 BLOCK2 current running instruction

……. …….

…….. …….

D8729 BLOCK99 current running instruction

10-8．Program example Example 1: This example is used in the tracking system. The process is like this: Output some pulses and prohibit the exterior interruption. Continue outputting the pulse but at low speed, and open the exterior interruption. When checked the exterior cursor signal, stop the pulse outputting and machine running.

Ladder chart:

The instruction list content: RST M8050 Notes: M8050: prohibit the exterior interruption

MOV K100 D100

SBLOCKE

MOV K1000 D0

MOV K20000 D2

MOV K0 D4

I0000

IRET

M8000 STOP Y0

M8002 ( )S

M8050

X0↑ SBLOCK Sequence block1

DPLSR D0 D2 D4 Y0

Instruction list

DPLSR D100 D102 D104 Y0

M8000

MOV K300 D102

MOV K20 D104

( )SM8050

Output the pulses at low speed

PLC power on, prohibit the exterior interruption

BLOCK starts

Output the pulses and move some distance

Reset M8050, open the exterior interruption

BLOCK ends

The first pulse frequency

The first pulse numbers

Accelerate/decelerate time for the first pulse

The second pulse frequency

The second pulse numbers

Accelerate/decelerate time for the second pulse

Stop outputting the pulse

Close the interruption

The interruption ends

The interruption starts

Example 2: One PLC (master station no.1) communicates with 3 PLCs (slave station no. 2, 3, 4) via serial port 2 RS485. Master PLC needs to read the D0 value of 3 PLCs. Then store the value in master PLC D100~D102.

M8000 is normal ON coil, the master PLC can real-time communicate with slave PLCs.

Communicate with slave station 2 Communicate with slave station 3 Communicate with slave station 4

11 Special Function Instructions

In this chapter, we mainly introduce PWM pulse width modulation, frequency detect, precise time, interruption etc;

11-1．PWM Pulse Width Modulation

11-2．Frequency Detect

11-3．Precise Time

11-4．Interruption

Instructions List

Mnemonic Function Circuit and soft components Chapter

Pulse Width Modulation, Frequency Detection

PWM Output pulse with the specified occupied ratio and frequency

PWM S1 S2 D 11-1

FRQM Frequency Detection FRQM S1 D S2 S3

11-2

Time

STR Precise Time STR D1 D2

11-3

STRR Read Precise Time Register

STRR S

11-3

STRS Stop Precise Time STRS S

11-3

Interruption

EI Enable Interruption EI

11-4-1

DI Disable Interruption DI

11-4-1

IRET Interruption Return IRET

11-4-1

11-1．PWM Pulse Width Modulation 1、Instruction’s Summary

Instruction to realize PWM pulse width modulation PWM pulse width modulation [PWM] 16 bits instruction

PWM 32 bits instruction

-

execution condition

normally ON/OFF coil suitable models


hardware requirement

- software requirement

-

2、Operands Operands Function Type S1 specify the occupy ratio value or soft component’s ID

number 16 bits, BIN

S2 specify the output frequency or soft component’s ID number

16 bits, BIN

D specify the pulse output port bit 3、Suitable Soft Components

PWM K100 D10 Y0X0

S1· S2· D·



S1 ● ● ● ● ●

S2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit

Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

Function and

Action

T0

t

11-2．Frequency Testing 1、Instruction’s Summary Instruction to realize frequency testing frequency testing [FRQM] 16 bits instruction

FRQM 32 bits instruction

-

execution condition

normally ON/OFF coil suitable models



- software requirement

-

2、Operands

Operands Function Type S1 Specify the sampling pulse quantity or soft component’s

ID number 32 bits, BIN

S2 Specify the frequency division value 32 bits, BIN S3 Specify the pulse input port bit D specify the tested result’s soft component’s number 32 bits, BIN

The occupy ratio n: 1~255 Output pulse f: 0~72KHz Pulse is output at Y0 or Y1 (Please use transistor output)

The output occupy empty ratio of PMW =n /256×100%

PWM output use the unit of 0.1Hz, so when set (S2) frequency, the set value is 10 times of

the actual frequency (i.e. 10f). E.g.：to set the frequency as 72KHz, then set value in (S2) is

720000.

When X000 is ON, output PWM wave；when X000 is OFF, stop output. PMW output

doesn’t have pulse accumulation.

In the left graph: T0=1/f T/T0=n/256


FRQM K20 D100 K1 X003X000

D·S1· S2· S3·



S1 ● ● ● ●

S2 ●

D ● ● ●

Word

Bit Operands System

X Y M S T C Dn.m

S3 ●


S1: sampling pulse quantity: the number to calculate the pulse frequency, this parameter can be changed as the frequency (generally, the higher the frequency the larger the pulse quantity)

D: tested result, the unit is Hz. S2: Frequency division choice. Range: K1 or K2; Whatever K1 or K2, the effect is the same. Testing frequency range is 1~200KHz. The testing precision will change when the frequency increasing. 1~80KHz,

precision is 100%; 80~200KHz, precision is 99.5%.

When X0 is ON, FRQM will test 20 pulse from X3 every scan cycle. Calculate the

frequency’s value and save into D100. Test repeat. If the tested frequency’s value is

smaller than the test range, then return the test value is 0.

The pulse output to X number:

Type X terminal XC2 14/16/24/32/48/60 X1 XC3 24/32/42 X1 XC5 48/60 X1 XCM 60 X1

11-3．Precise Time

1、Instruction List Read and stop precise time when execute precise time;

precise time [STR] 16 bits instruction

- 32 bits instruction

STR

execution condition

edge activation suitable models



- software requirements

-

read precise time [STRR] 16 bits instruction


STRR

execution condition




V3.0e and above software requirements

-

stop precise time [STRS] 16 bits instruction


STRS

execution condition




V3.0e and above software requirements

-

2、Operands Operands Function Type D Timer Number bit D1 Timer Number bit D2 specify timer’s value or soft component’s ID

number 16 bits, BIN




D2 ● ● ● ● ●

Word

Bit operands system

X Y M S T C Dn.m

D ●

D1 ●

《Precise Time》

STR T600 K100X0

D1· D2·

Y0T600

RST T600M0

X0

T600

100ms 100ms

M0

《read the precise time》、《stop precise time》

STRR T600X0

STRS T600M0

D·

D·


D1: Timer’s number. Range: T600~T618 (T600、T602、T604…T618, the number should be even) D2: Time Value The precise timer works in form of 1ms The precise timer is 32 bits, the count range is 0~+2,147,483,647. When executing STR, the timer will be reset before start timing. When X0 turns from OFF to ON, timer T600 starts to time, when time

accumulation reaches 100ms, set T600; if X0 again turns from OFF to ON, timer T600 turns from ON to OFF，restart to time, when time accumulation reaches 100ms, T600 reset again. See graph below:

When X0 changes from OFF to ON, move the current precise time value into TD600 immediately, it will not be affected by the scan cycle;

When M0 changes from OFF to ON, execute STRS

instruction immediately, stop precise time and refresh the count value in TD600. It will not be affected by the scan cycle;

STR T600 K100X0

RST T600M0

I3001

IRET

FEND

Interruption Tag correspond to the Timer

Timer’s Nr. Interruption Tag T600 I3001 T602 I3002 T604 I3003 T606 I3004 T608 I3005 T610 I3006 T612 I3007 T614 I3008 T616 I3009 T618 I3010

When the precise time reaches the count value, it will generate an interruption tag, interruption subprogram will be executed.

Start the precise time in precise time interruption; Every precise timer has its own interruption tag, see table below:

Precise Time Interruption

When X0 changes from OFF to ON, T600 starts timing. When time accumulates to 100ms, set ON T600; meantime, generate an interruption, the program jumps to interruption tag I3001 and execute the subprogram.

11-4．Interruption

XC series PLC are equipped with interruption function. The interruption function includes external interruption and time interruption. Via interruption function we can dispose some special programs. This function is not affected by the scan cycle.

11-4-1．External Interruption The input terminals X can be used to input external interruption. Each input terminal corresponds with one external interruption. The input’s rising/falling edge can activate the interruption. The interruption subroutine is written behind the main program (behind FEND). After interruption generates, the main program stops running immediately, turn to run the correspond subroutine. After subroutine running ends, continue to execute the main program.

XC3-14

Input Terminal

Pointer No. Disable the interruption instruction

Rising Interruption

Falling Interruption

X7 I0000 I0001 M8050

XC2-14/16

Input terminal


Rising interruption

Falling interruption

X2 I0000 I0001 M8050 X5 I0100 I0101 M8051

XC2-24/32/48/60、XC3-24/32/42、XC5-24/32/48/60

Input Terminal


Rising Interruption


X2 I0000 I0001 M8050 X5 I0100 I0101 M8051 X10 I0200 I0201 M8052

Main Program Main Program

subprogram

Input interrupt

External Interruption’s Port Definition

XC3-48/60、XC3-19AR-E

Input Terminal


Rising Interruption


X10 I0000 I0001 M8050 X7 I0100 I0101 M8051 X6 I0200 I0201 M8052

XCM-24/32 (3 or 4 axis output)

Input Terminal

Pointer No. Disable the interruption

instruction Rising

Interruption Falling

Interruption X2 I0000 I0001 M8050 X5 I0100 I0101 M8051 X10 I0200 I0201 M8052 X11 I0300 I0301 M8053 X12 I0400 I0401 M8054 X13 I0500 I0501 M8055

XCM-60

Input Terminal


instruction Rising


Interruption X2 I0000 I0001 M8050 X3 I0100 I0101 M8051 X4 I0200 I0201 M8052 X5 I0300 I0301 M8053

XCC-24

Input Terminal


instruction Rising


Interruption X14 I0000 I0001 M8050 X15 I0100 I0101 M8051

XCC-32

Input Terminal


instruction Rising


Interruption X14 I0000 I0001 M8050 X15 I0100 I0101 M8051 X16 I0200 I0201 M8052 X17 I0300 I0301 M8053

Enable Interruption [EI]、Disable Interruption [DI]、Interruption Return [IRET]

If use EI instruction to allow interruption, then when scanning the program, if interruption input changes from OFF to be ON, then execute subroutine①、②, return to the original main program;

Interruption pointer (I****) should be

behind FEND instruction; PLC is default to allow interruption

Via program with DI instruction, set interruption forbidden area;

Allow interruption input between EI~DI

If interruption forbidden is not required, please program only with EI, program with DI is not required.

Interruption Instruction

Interruption’s Range Limitation

11-4-2．Time Interruption

Every input interruption is equipped with special relay (M8050~M8052) to disable interruption;

In the left program, if use M0 to set

M8050 “ON”, then disable the interruption input at channel 0.


In the condition of main program’s execution cycle long, if you need to handle a special program; or during the sequential scanning, a special program needs to be executed at every certain time, time interruption function is required. This function is not affected by PLC’s scan cycle, every Nm, execute time interruption subroutine.

Disable the Interruption

Y0

FEND

I4010

INC D0

IRET

X0

M8000

Interruption No.

Interruption Forbidden Instruction

Description

I40** M8056

“**” represents time interruption’s time, range from 1 to 99, unit is ms.

I41** M8057

I42** M8058

I43** - I44** - I45** - I46** - I47** - I48** - I49** -

Time interruption is default in open status, time interruption subroutine is similar with other interruption subroutine, it should be written behind the main program, starts with I40xx, ends with IRET.

There are 10CH time interruptions. The represent method is I40**~I49** (“**” means time interruption’s time, unit is ms. For example, I4010 means run one channel time interruption every 10ms.

Interruption No.

FEND

I4010

IRET

DI

EI

EI

M8056

FEND

I4020

IRET

END

M0

Normally time interruption is in “allow” status With EI、DI can set interruption’s allow or forbidden area. As in the above

graph, all time interruptions are forbidden between DI~EI, and allowed beyond DI~EI.

Interruption Allowed


Interruption Forbidden

Interruption Program

The first 3CH interruptions are equipped with special relays (M8056~M8059) to forbid interrupt

In the left example program, if use M0 to

enable M8056 “ON”, the forbid 0CH’s time interruption.

Interruption range’s limitation

Interruption Forbidden


Interruption Program

12 Application Program Samples

In this chapter, we make some samples about pulse output instruction, Modbus communication instructions and free format communication instructions etc.

12-1．Pulse Output Sample

12-2．Modbus Communication Sample

12-3．Free Format Communication Sample

12-1．Pulse Output Application Example: send high frequency and low frequency of pulse Parameters: Stepping motor parameters: step angle= 1.8 degrees/step, scale=40, pulse number per rotate is 8000 High frequency pulse: maximum frequency is 100KHz, total pulse number is 24000 (3 rotates) Low frequency pulse: maximum frequency is 10KHz, total pulse number is 8000 (1 rotates) Ladder Program:

Explanation: When PLC changes from STOP to RUN, set ON M0, set the high frequency parameter D0, D2, low frequency parameter D4, D6, speed up/down time D20, clear D8~D11, set ON M1, set OFF M0. The motor rotates at high frequency for 3 turns, set ON M8170; then the motor rotates at low frequency for 1 turn, set OFF M8170, set OFF M1.

100000

10000

0 High frequency 3 turns Low frequency 1 turn

frequency

t

12-2．MODBUS COMMUNICATION SAMPLES Example 1: one master station communicates with 3 slave stations.

Operation: (1) write content in D10~D14 to D10~D14 of slave station 2; (2) read D15~D19 of the slave station 2 to D15~D19 of the mater station; anyhow, write the first five registers’ content to the slaves, the left five registers are used to store the content from the slaves; (3) slave station 3 and 4 are similar; Soft component’s comments: D0: communication station number D1: offset M2: station 2 communication error M3: station 3 communication error M4: station 4 communication error M8137: COM2 communication error end signal M8138: COM2 communication correct end signal

Ladder chart

S0: write the target station S1: read the target station S2: judge the communication status S3: offset the communication address T200: communication interval 1 T201: communication interval 2 D20: plus one for write error times D21: plus one for read error times

Program Explanation: When PLC turns from STOP to RUN, M8002 gets a scan cycle. S0 flow open, write the master’s D10~D14 to slave 2 D10~D14. If the communication is successful, it goes to the next flow; if not, it will try three times then go to the S1 flow. It delays for a while then read D15~D19 of station 2. The method is similar to S0 flow. Then go to S2 flow. If the communication is failed, set ON M23. Then it goes to S3 flow. S3 flow will judge the station no, if the no. is less than 4, the station no. will plus 1, offset value plus 10; if not, the station no. will start again from 2.

Example 2: XINJE PLC writes frequency to two inverters via Modbus.

Set the first inverter’s station no. to 1; set the second inverter’s station no. to 2; store the frequency in D1000 and D2000. Communicate with inverter via serial port.

Program Description: Use BLOCK to make the program. The two Modbus instructions will be executed from up to down. 12-3．Free Format Communication Example In this example, we use DH107/DH108 series instruments; 1、Interface Specifications DH107/DH108 series instruments use asynchronous serial communication interface, the interface level fits RS232C or RS485 standard. The data format is: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity, one/two stop bit. The baud rate can be 1200~19200bit/s . 2、Communication Instruction Format DH107/108 instruments use Hex data form to represent each instruction code and data; Read/write instructions: Read: address code +52H (82) +the para.(to read) code +0+0+CRC parity code Write: address code +43H（67）+ the para.(to write) code +low bytes of the wrote data + high bytes of the wrote data +CRC parity code The read instruction’s CRC parity code is: the para. (to read) code *256+82+ADDR ADDR is instrument’s address para., the range is 0~100 (pay attention not to add 80H). CRC is the remainder from the addition of the above data (binary 16bits integral). The reminder is 2 bytes, the high byte is behind the low byte; The write instruction’s CRC parity code is: the para. (to write) code *256+67+ the para. value (to write) +ADDR The parameter. to write represents with 16 bits binary integral; No matter to write or read, the instrument should return data as shown below: The test value PV+ given value SV+ output value MV and alarm status +read/write parameters value +CRC parity code Among in, PV、SV and the read parameters are all in integral form, each occupies two bytes, MV occupies one byte, the value range is 0~220, alarm status occupies one byte, CRC parity code

occupies two bytes, totally 10 byes. CRC parity code is the reminder from the result of PV+SV+ (alarm status *256+MV)+ para. value +ADDR; (for details, please refer to AIBUS communication description)

3、Write the program After power on the PLC, the PLC read the current temperature every 40ms. During this period, the user can write the set temperature. Data zone definition: buffer area of sending data D10~D19

buffer area of accepting data D20~D29 instruction’s station number: D30 read command’s value: D31=52 H write command’s value: D32=43 H parameter’s code: D33 temperature setting: D34 CRC parity code: D36 Temperature display: D200,D201

The send data form: 81H 81H 43H 00H c8H 00H 0cH 01H (current temperature display) Communication parameters setting: baud rate: 9600, 8 data bits, 2 stop bits, no parity Set FD8220=255; FD8221=5 ( the hardware and software must be V2.4 or above)

Ladder:

Write instrument’s station Nr. K1 in to D30

Time 40ms

Output M10

Write the read code 52H into D31

Clear registers D40-D56

D30 add H80 to get value 81H

move D40 (81H) to D10

move D40 (81H) to D11

move D31 (read code 52H) to D12

move D33 (para. code) to D13

write zero to D14

write zero to D15

below is to calculate CRC parity;

D33 multiply K256, the result is saved in D42

D42 add K82, the result is stored in D44

D44 add D30 (instrument’s station), the result

is saved in D52

Move D52 into D54 Logic AND D54 with HFF, save the result in D16

Move D52 into D56

Right shift 8 bits with D56 (convert the high

8bits to the low 8 bits)

Logic AND D56 with HFF, save the result in

D17

↓

M11↑

M10H43 D32MOV

K0 D40FMOV D56

D30 H80ADD D40

D40 D10MOV

D40 D11MOV

D32 D12MOV

D33 D13MOV

D34 D42MOV

D34 D44MOV

D33 K256MUL D46

D46 K67ADD D48

D48 D34ADD D50

D52 D54MOV

D44 HFFWAND D15

D52 D56MOV

D44 K8ROR

D54 HFFWAND D16

D42 HFFWAND D14

D50 D30ADD D52

D56 K8ROR

D56 HFFWAND D17M10↑ D10 K8SEND K2

M11↑

M8132D20 K10RCV K2

D101 K8ROL

D101 D100WOR D200

D103 K8ROL

D102 D103WOR D201

M8134D100 K10D20BMOV↓

Write code H43 into D32

Clear registers D40-D56

D30 (station Nr.) add H80, save the result in

D40

Move D40 to D10

Move D40 to D11

Move D32 (write code H43) to D12

Move D33 (para .code) to D13 Move D34 (temp. set) to D42

Logic and D42 with HFF, save data in D14

Move D34 (temp. set) to D44 D44 right shift 8 bits

Logic and D44 with HFF, save data in D15

Below is to calculate CRC parity:

D33 (para. code) multiply K256, save result

in D46

D46 add K67, save data in D48

D48 add D34, save data in D50

D50 add D30, save data in D52

Move D52 to D54

Logic and D54 with HFF, save result in D16

Move D52 to D56

Right shift 8 bits with D56

Logic and D56 with HFF, save result in D17

Send data D10-D17 out

Read the returned data and save in D20-D29

Move the returned data to D100~109

Left shift 8 bits with D101

Logic OR D101 with D100, save result in

D200

Left shift 8 bits with D103

Logic OR D102 with D103, save result in D201

Program Description: The above program is written according to DH instrument’s communication protocol, the soft component’s functions are listed below: Relationship of sent (SEND) data string and registers: D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 Read Address

code Address code

Read code 52H

Parameters code

0 0 CRC low bytes

CRC high bytes

Write Address code

Address code

Write code 42H

Parameters code

low bytes of the written data

high bytes of the written data

CRC low bytes

CRC high bytes

Relationship of received (RCV) data (data returned by the instrument) and the registers: D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 PV low bytes

PV high bytes

SV low bytes

SV high bytes

Output value

Alarm status

Read/write low bytes

Read/write high bytes

CRC low bytes

CRC high bytes

So, if write data string according to the communication objects’ protocol, use SEND and RCV commands from free format communication, user will get the communication with the objects.

Documents

Program Summary · 2013-07-18 · Program Summary XC series PLC as the controllers, accept ... C Language Function Block ... please refer《XC series PLC user manual【software part